TABLE OF CONTENTS · Exhibit A – Sample Form of Bid Bond 1 . Exhibit B – Sample Form of Consent of Surety 1 . Exhibit C – Sample Form of Performance Bond 4 . Exhibit D – Sample

INTERIOR RENOVATIONS @ SA PROJECT NO: 19.099 M. ALLAN VOGELSON LIBRARY CAMDEN COUNTY LIBRARY SYSTEM JUNE 2020

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC -1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Advertisement for Bids 1 Form of Proposal 3 Bidders Checklist 2 Instructions to Bidders 17 Exhibit A – Sample Form of Bid Bond 1 Exhibit B – Sample Form of Consent of Surety 1 Exhibit C – Sample Form of Performance Bond 4 Exhibit D – Sample Form of Terms of Letter of Credit 2 Exhibit E – Statement of Ownership Disclosure 2 Exhibit F – Non-Collusion Affidavit 1 Exhibit G – Mandatory Equal Opportunity Language – Goods, Service Contracts 2 Exhibit H – Mandatory Equal Opportunity Language - Construction Contracts 4 Exhibit I – Questionnaire on Supply/Service Contracts 1 Exhibit J – Affirmative Action Plan MBE/WBE Tracking Form 1 Exhibit K – Certification Regarding Debarment & Suspension 2 Exhibit L – Extension of Prices to Registered System Members 1 Exhibit M – Disclosure of Subcontractors & Sites & Certification of Compliance 1 Exhibit N – Bids for Construction Disclosure of Subcontractors 1 Exhibit O – Affidavit of Compliance with Instructions to Bidders 2 Exhibit P – ADA Mandatory Language 1 Exhibit Q – Acknowledgement of Receipt of Addenda 1 Exhibit R – Uniformed Law Enforcement Officers Requirement 1 Exhibit S – Responsible Contractor and Subcontractor Policy Certification 4 Exhibit T – Exceptions to Bid Boilerplate and Technical Specifications 1 Exhibit U – Disclosure of Investment Activities in Iran 2 Exhibit V – New Jersey Anti-Discrimination Provisions 1 List of Drawings 2

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section Description # of Pages 01010 Summary of Work 3 01015 Contractor’s Use of Premises 2 01020 Allowances 2 01021 Contractor’s Special Responsibilities 2 01027 Applications for Payment 4 01035 Modification Procedures 2 01040 Project Coordination – Single Prime Contracts 3 01045 Cutting and Patching 3 01095 Reference Standards and Definitions 2 01200 Project Meetings 2 01300 Submittals 5



01350 Monthly Submission Checklist 2 01500 Temporary Facilities 2 01600 Materials and Equipment 3 01631 Product Substitutions 2 01700 Project Closeout 2 01701 Project Closeout Submission Checklist 3 01710 Final Cleaning 2 01720 Project Record Documents 2 01740 Warranties and Bonds 2 DIVISION 2 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 02200 Selective Demolition 5 DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03541 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment 3 DIVISION 4 – NOT USED DIVISION 5 – METALS 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 6 DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 5 06200 Interior Carpentry 5 06411 Plastic Laminate Clad Architectural Cabinets 7 06651 Solid Surface Fabrications 6 DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07841 Firestop Systems 7 07920 Joint Sealants 6 DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS 080152.61 Wood Window Repair 7 08121 Hollow Metal Frames 4 08211 Flush Wood Doors 4 08255/08410/ Fiberglass Reiforced Panels, Aluminum Door Perimeter + Storefront 08120 Framing System, Monolithic Style Rail and Doors 14 08710 Door Hardware 22 08810 Glazing 9 088113 Decorative Glass Glazing 3



DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09221 Non Structural Metal Framing 4 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies 8 09912 Painting 7 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101423 Panel Signage 6

INVITATION TO BID FOR BID #A28-20

IMPROVEMENTS TO VOGELSON LIBRARY FOR THE

CAMDEN COUNTY LIBRARY SYSTEM

Notice is hereby given that sealed bids for Bid #A28-20, Improvements to Vogelson Library will be received, opened and read in public at the Camden County Courthouse, 1st Floor Lobby, 520 Market Street, Camden, New Jersey 08102 on Friday June 12, 2020 at 10:00AM prevailing time by the Camden County Purchasing Agent or her designee. It is recommended that each bid be sent by U.S. Mail to the Camden County Division of Purchasing, Courthouse 17th Floor, 520 Market Street, Camden, NJ 08102. If hand-delivered, bids must be left in the bin accessible from the 6th Street entrance of the Courthouse at 520 Market Street, Camden, NJ 08102. Bin access is 8:30 AM to 4:00 PM only. The County assumes no responsibility for delays in any form of carrier, mail or delivery service causing the bid to be received at the Division of Purchasing later than the above-referenced scheduled opening. The Bid Documents have been prepared by Settembrino Architects with an office at 25 Bridge Ave, Suite 201, Red Bank, NJ, 07701. Bid documents may be obtained directly from the office of the architect, on June 1, 2020, as an electronic PDF document only, by emailing the company name, contact info, phone, fax and email address to [email protected]. Questions will be due to Settembrino Architects by June 2, 2020 at noon. Bidders shall email questions to [email protected]. Bidders are required to comply with the requirements of P.L. 1975, c.127 (N.J.A.C. 17:27). Bidders are required to comply with the requirements of P.L. 1999, c. 238 (N.J.S.A. 34:11-56.48 to 57), where applicable. All bidders are responsible for obtaining complete bid documentation from the County at the website listed above. In the event of any inconsistencies between this advertisement, as published, and the bid documentation, the bid documentation shall control. By order of the Board of Chosen Freeholders of Camden County, New Jersey. Anna Marie Wright, Camden County Purchasing Agent

mailto:[email protected]


Page 1 of 2

FORM OF PROPOSAL

The undersigned (name of bidder) _______________________________ after, complete examination of the plans, specifications, addenda, form of contract, and bond hereby proposes to furnish all labor and materials, together with all incidental thereto, to complete the project in accordance with drawings, specifications and addenda prepared by Settembrino Architects, 25 Bridge Ave. Suite 201 | Red Bank, NJ 07701 which are understood as being a part of this Proposal.

NOTE: ALL AMOUNTS SHALL BE SHOWN IN BOTH WORDS AND FIGURES. In case of a discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.

Furnish all Labor and materials as required to complete the project in accordance with the contract documents.

BASE BID Dollars ($

GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ALLOWANCE: . ...Dollars ($ 25,000)

TOTAL BASE BID INCLUDING ALLOWANCE:

SEAL IF BID IS BY A CORPORATION Respectfully submitted,

Date:

By: Name of Firm

Affix Corporate Signature Seal Here

Business Address

Phone

Page 2 of 2

The date of substantial completion: is October 31, 2020. It is recognized that no two pieces of equipment and no two products are engineered or designed exactly the same. Trade names, brand names and models specified herein are provided to establish a minimum standard of quality acceptable to the County for this bid. Substitute brands, makes and models shall be considered and reviewed on the basis of their ability to perform the specified tasks or provide the same quality of goods as specified in the County's bid. This is known as an "Equivalent". If the bidder seeks to provide an Equivalent product or good, the bidder shall with its bid submission include specifications or cut sheets for such proposed Equivalent product or good. The County's Architect/Engineer for the bid shall review the submission provided by the bidder to determine whether the product or good is an Equivalent to the bid specification. The County's Architect/Engineer for the bid shall have the final decision on whether a bidder's submitted product specifications are an Equivalent to the named product(s) or good(s) in this bid. Liquidated Damages: If the Contractor fails to complete the project and each and every part and appurtenance thereof fully, entirely and in conformity with the provisions of the contract within the times stated in the contract, or within such further time as may have been granted in accordance with the provisions of the contract, then the County may withhold permanently from the Contract’s total compensation the appropriate amount of $500.00 for each and every day that the work remains incomplete, which said amount shall not be considered a penalty, but liquidated damages for the loss, inconvenience and extra expense to the County by such delays. Should any requirements in the contract documents be found to conflict with the County’s general bid boilerplate (the ITB pages) the general bid boilerplate provisions and language shall prevail

ALL BIDDERS MUST USE THIS FORM.

[ITB-1] Version 1-7-20

CAMDEN COUNTY DIVISION OF PURCHASING COURTHOUSE - 17TH FLOOR

520 MARKET STREET CAMDEN, NEW JERSEY 08102-1375

(856) 225-5439

DATE_____________________

Bid No. and Title: ______________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

____

1. PRICES MUST INCLUDE DELIVERIES TO ALL SITES SET FORTH HEREIN.

2. Quotations must be made on these sheets. Camden County is not responsible for anyexpenses incurred by any firm in preparing or submitting a bid proposal.

3. Prices may be submitted on any or all the items listed unless otherwise specified. Award ofcontract for goods and services will be made based on the lowest responsible bid on each itemor on an aggregate basis, whichever is in the best interest of Camden County and SystemMembers (if this is a Cooperative Pricing bid).

4. Insert NET UNIT PRICES. Bids must be firm for a minimum of 60 days. Contract prices maynot be increased during the term of the contract.

5. Camden County and System Members are exempt from sales tax.

6 The County of Camden reserves the right to accept or reject any part or parts of the responsesto this bid in accordance with law.

7. To the extent that any of these instructions directly contradict the bid specifications, the bidspecifications shall prevail.

8. The County of Camden shall only be responsible for the payment of interest or late fees asprovided pursuant to N.J.S.A. 2A:30A-2(c).

9. Official County bid packages for routine goods and services are available from the CamdenCounty Division of Purchasing at no cost to the vendor. (Bids for highway projects are issued bythat department for a fee). All addenda are issued by the Division of Purchasing (or Highwaydepartment if applicable). Potential bidders are cautioned that they are bidding at theirown risk if a third party supplied the bid specifications. Such specifications may or may notbe complete. The County is not responsible for third party supplied bid specifications.

10. Bidders are required to comply with the requirements of P.L. 1999, c. 238 (N.J.S.A. 34:11-56.25et seq.) regarding prevailing wages, where applicable.

June 1, 2020

A28-20 Improvements to Vogelson Library

10 am,BIDS MUST BE RETURNED NO LATER THAN O'CLOCK, PREVAILING TIME

ON June 12, 2020__.


11. Bidders are hereby noticed that the County shall correct certain types of clerical errors if found insubmitted bids. For example, if the quantity needed or the standard unit of measurement used,times the unit price, is incorrectly calculated in reaching a total or final price, the County willcorrect the computational mistake.

12. The county requires bidders to list any exceptions to the bid specifications. For anyexceptions listed the County shall determine if it will accept an immaterial, or minor,deviation from its bid specifications as permitted by law. Material exceptions shall because for rejection of the bid. Bidders shall not be permitted to remove listed exceptions.

13. N.J.S.A. 40A:11-2.1 and 52:32-55 prohibits State and local public contracts with persons orentities engaging in certain investment activities in energy or finance sectors of Iran.

14. Official notification of contract awards authorized by the County may be viewed oncamdencounty.com. To review, click on the gold “Your Government” tab, scroll to theinformation box on the left and click on “County Public Information”, then click on “FreeholderMeetings”. Meetings and agendas are found here. Click on “Freeholder Meeting(AGENDA)” for the month you would like to view. Copies of resolutions and bid resultsrequire an OPRA request. See camdencounty.com for OPRA form and process.

15. Should any requirements or language contained in the contract documents/technicalspecifications be found to conflict with the County’s general bid boilerplate (ITB pages), therequirements/language in the bid boilerplate shall prevail.

16. BIDDERS ARE REQUIRED TO USE THE COUNTY’S FORMS AND SHALL NOT RECREATE IN ANYWAY THE FORMS PROVIDED WITH THIS BID. FAILURE TO USE THE COUNTY FORMS ORADDING TO, AMENDING, ALTERING, OR REVISING THE COUNTY FORMS, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, CONVERTING THE COUNTY PDF OR HARDCOPY TO A WORD DOCUMENT,SHALL BE CAUSE FOR REJECTION OF THE BID.

WE SUBMIT HEREWITH our prices as indicated on the following bid.

Submitted on_____________, 20________ BY____________________________________ (Name of Company)

Fax No.__________________________ PER__________________________________ (Signature and Title of

Authorized Representative)

E-Mail: __________________________ Phone No.___________________________


BIDDER’S CHECKLIST

THIS BIDDER’S CHECKLIST MUST BE COMPLETED, SIGNED AND SUBMITTED WITH YOUR BID PACKAGE.

1. Bid Guarantee deposit in the form of a certifiedcheck, cashier's check or bid bond. See Paragraph4.1 and Exhibit A. (Must be submitted with bid) ________

2. Certificate from a Surety Company or Financial Institutionstating that if bid is accepted, they will provide the requiredperformance bond or Letter of Credit. See Paragraphs 4.2, 8.1and 8.2, and Exhibits B, C, and D. (Must be submitted with bid,must include originals – copies will not be accepted) ________

3. Statement of Corporate Ownership listing the namesand HOME addresses of all individuals owning ten percent(10%) or more of corporation, partnership or LLC.See Exhibit E. (Must be submitted prior to or with bid) ________

4. Non-collusion Affidavit properly notarized. SeeExhibit F. ________

5. Affirmative Action Questionnaire with availableevidence submitted. See Paragraph 5and Exhibit I. ________

6. Affirmative Action MBE/WBE Tracking Form. SeeParagraph 5 and Exhibit J. ________

7. Debarment Certification Form. See Exhibit K. ________

8. Extension or Non-Extension of Prices toRegistered System Members (Other Agencies)See Paragraph 22.1 and Exhibit L. ________

9. Textile/Apparel Subcontractor Disclosure Requirements

For Bids for Textiles and/or Items of Apparel Only.Disclosure of all subcontractors and sites andCertification of Compliance for textile and apparelbids. See Paragraphs 23.1 and Paragraph 23.2 andExhibit M. (Must be submitted with bid). ________

[BIDDER’S CHECKLIST CONTINUED NEXT PAGE]

NA

NA


BIDDER’S CHECKLIST (cont’d)

10. Proof of compliance with The Public Works ContractorRegistration Act, if applicable. See Paragraph 24.(Must be submitted prior to award of contract). ________

11. Construction Subcontractor Disclosure Requirements

a. For Bids for Construction Only.Disclosure of subcontractors as required by N.J.S.A.40A:11-16. See Paragraph 26 and Exhibit N.(Must be submitted with bid) ________

12. Proof of compliance with the requirements forsignificant public works projects, where applicable.See Paragraph 27 and Exhibit O.(Must be submitted with bid). ________

13. Proof of compliance with the State Contractor BusinessRegistration Program. See Paragraph 31. ________

14. Acknowledgement of Receipt of Addenda, whether ornot issued, N.J.S.A. 40A:11-23.2. See Paragraph 32and Exhibit Q. (Form must be submitted with bid). ________

15. Uniformed Law Enforcement Officer requirement form.Exhibit R. ________

16. Certification - Disclosure of Investment Activities in Iran,Exhibit S. (Form must be submitted with bid). ________

____________________________________________ NAME OF BIDDER

______________________ SIGNATURE DATE

NA


INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. RECEIPT, OPENING, WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS, AND FAILURE TO RESPOND 1.1 Sealed Bids will be received by the County on the date, time, location, and in the

manner as listed in the advertisement. 1.2 Bids must be received at the Camden County department stipulated in the

advertisement no later than the due date and time indicated therein. It is recommended that bids be hand delivered to that department. The County assumes no responsibility for delays in any form of courier or mail order delivery service causing the bid to be received at the department stipulated later than the due date and time. All late bids will be rejected in accordance with the law.

1.3 Any bid may be withdrawn prior to the time for openings of bids or the authorized

postponement thereof. Any bid received after the opening of bids will not be considered. No bidder may withdraw a bid within sixty (60) days after the actual opening thereof.

2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 The County may make such investigation as it deems necessary to determine the ability

of the bidder to perform the work and the bidder shall furnish to the County all such information and data for this purpose as the County may request. The County reserves the right to reject any bids if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of such bidder, fails to satisfy the County that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work contemplated herein.

3. PREPARATION OF BID 3.1 Bids must be submitted on the prescribed form. ONE ORIGINAL (1) AND TWO (2)

COPIES of the bid should be submitted. The bidder shall fill in all blank spaces in ink or by typewriter, both in words and figures. Bids must be signed in ink by authorities with capacity to legally bind the bidder to its bid proposal.

3.2 Each bid shall be based upon the specifications prepared by the County. The bidder

accepts the obligation to become familiar with the County's specifications. 3.3 Each bid must give the full business address of the bidder and be signed by an

authorized representative. Bids by partnerships must furnish the full name of all partners and must be signed in the partnership name by one of the members of the partnership or by an authorized representative, followed by the signature and designation of the person signing. Bids by corporations must be signed in the legal name of the corporation, followed by the name of the State of Incorporation and must contain the signature and designation of the President, Secretary or other person authorized to bind the corporation in the matter. When requested by the County, satisfactory evidence of the authority of the officer signing on behalf of the corporation shall be furnished.

3.4 Bids containing any conditions, omissions, unexplained erasures or alterations, items

not called for in the proposal form, attachment or additive information not required by the bid documents, or irregularities of any kind, may be rejected by the County. Any changes, white-outs, strike-outs, etc. on the proposal page must be clear as to meaning and initialed by the person responsible for signing the bid.


3.5 The County reserves the right to waive any minor informalities in the bids received as permitted by law or reject bids under certain circumstances as permitted by law.

3.6 All bids must be submitted in sealed envelopes bearing on the outside the name of the

bidder, address and subject and title of the specifications. If forwarded by mail, the sealed envelope containing the bid must be enclosed in another envelope, addressed as set forth in the advertisement. The County assumes no responsibility for mailings not received on time at the department stipulated in the advertisement to receive bids. It is therefore recommended that bids be hand delivered.

3.7 Bidders must insert prices for furnishing all the materials and/or labor required by these

specifications whether or not such requirement is specifically set forth. Prices shall be net, including any charges for packing, crating, containers, etc. and all transportation charges fully pre-paid by the contractor F.O.B. destination and placement at locations specified by the County. No additional charges will be allowed for any transportation costs resulting from partial shipments made at the contractor's convenience when single shipment is ordered.

3.8 Payments will be made upon the approval of vouchers submitted by the successful

bidder in accordance with the requirements of the Board of Chosen Freeholders and subject to the County's customary billing procedures.

3.9 The County reserves the right to grant up to three (3) business days’ additional time to

bidders after the bid opening to provide the following documents required by the bid specifications:

a. Non-collusion affidavit. See Exhibit F;

b. Affirmative Action Questionnaire with available evidence submitted. See Paragraph 5 and Exhibit I;

c. Affirmative Action Plan MBE/WBE Tracking Form. See Paragraph 5 and Exhibit J;

d. Debarment Certification Form (Certification regarding the Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion - Lower Tier Covered Transactions). See Exhibit K.

Such additional time may not in any way affect the price or cost of the bid. All other

documents required by the bid specifications must be submitted at the time of the bid opening specified herein or in accordance with law.

4. BID BOND/CONSENT OF SURETY OR LETTER OF CREDIT 4.1 BID BOND Each bid must be accompanied by the Certified Check of the bidder or by a Cashier's

Check, or by a Bid Bond prepared on the form of bid bond attached hereto as Exhibit A, duly executed by the bidder as principal, having surety thereon, a surety company approved by the County, in an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the amount of the base bid submitted, said 10% not to exceed $20,000.00 pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11-21, payable to the Treasurer, Camden County. Only originals submitted on the County’s form Exhibit A will be accepted.


4.2 CONSENT OF SURETY OR LETTER OF CREDIT In addition, the bid must also be accompanied by a Certificate (Consent of Surety) from

a Surety Company stating that it will provide said bidder with a Performance Bond in the full amount of the bid. County forms are required to be used. A form of Consent of Surety is attached hereto as Exhibit B. Only originals submitted on the County’s form Exhibit B will be accepted. A form of Performance Bond is attached hereto as Exhibit C. Exhibit C must be signed by the successful bidder and bidder’s surety after award of contract and must be returned with the contract. As an alternative to the consent of surety, bidders may provide a letter from a bank or similar financial institution stating that it will issue a Letter of Credit in the full amount of the bid and pursuant to the terms of the Letter of Credit in the specifications (See Exhibit D). This Letter of Credit option is not available on bids exceeding $100,000. Such bids require a Consent of Surety/Performance Bond. See N.J.S.A. 40A:11-22.

4.3 Per N.J.S.A. 40A:11-24(a), All bid security, except the security of the three apparent

lowest responsible bidders, shall be returned, unless otherwise requested by the bidder, within ten (10) days after the opening of bids, Sundays and holidays excepted, and the bids of such bidders shall be considered as withdrawn. Within three (3) days, Sundays and holidays excepted, after the awarding and signing of the contract, and the approval of the contractor’s performance bond, the bid security of the remaining unsuccessful bidders shall be returned to them.

5. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION 5.1 The successful bidder shall adhere to the mandatory affirmative action language

required by P.L. 1975, c.127 (N.J.A.C. 17:27) and N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq. 5.2 For procurement, professional and service contracts, the above-referenced mandatory

language shall be that set forth in Exhibit G. 5.3 For construction contracts, the above-referenced mandatory language shall be that set

forth in Exhibit H. 5.4 All bidders should complete the Affirmative Action Questionnaire set forth in Exhibit I

and follow its instructions. 5.5 All bidders should complete the Affirmative Action Plan MBE/WBE Tracking Form in

Exhibit J. 6. ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS 6.1 No interpretation of the meaning of any bid document will be made to any bidder orally.

Any request for interpretation shall be in writing, addressed to the County's representative stipulated in the bid and must be received at least ten (10) days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. All such interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in the form of written addenda to the specifications and will be distributed to all prospective bidders in accordance with N.J.S.A. 40A:11-23. Failure of any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such bidder from any obligation under his bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become part of the contract documents.


7. MISCELLANEOUS 7.1 At the time of the opening of bids, each bidder will be presumed to have read and to be

thoroughly familiar with the specifications and all other bid documents (including addenda). The failure or omission of any bidder to receive or examine any form, instrument or document shall in no way relieve any bidder from any obligation in respect to his bid.

7.2 In case of default by the successful bidder, the County of Camden may procure the

articles or services from other sources and hold the successful bidder responsible for any excess cost occasioned thereby.

7.3 County of Camden is exempt from any State sales tax and Federal excise tax. In

submitting this bid, the bidder certifies that its total bid price does not include any such taxes.

7.4 For purposes of evaluation where an equivalent is being furnished, the bidder must

indicate any variation to the County's specifications no matter how slight. If no variations are indicated, it will be construed that the bid fully and exactly complies with the County's specifications.

7.5 All bids submitted shall include in price any applicable permits, or fees required by any

other government entity that has jurisdiction to require the same. 7.6 In submitting its bid, the bidder certifies that the merchandise to be furnished will not

infringe upon any valid patent or trademark and that the successful bidder shall, at its own expense, defend all actions or suits charging such infringement, and will save the County harmless from any damages resulting from such infringement.

7.7 The bidder understands and agrees that, if awarded any contract by the County of

Camden, it shall be responsible for insuring that it and all subcontractors meet minimum safety, health and equipment requirements including provisions for protecting employees and the public from any hazards encountered in performing its obligations pursuant to this bid.

7.8 All Firms are advised that, pursuant to N.J.S.A. 19:44A-20.27, it is their responsibility to

file an annual disclosure statement with the New Jersey Election Law Enforcement Commission (“ELEC”) if, during the calendar year, they receive a contract(s) in excess of $50,000 from public entities, including Camden County. It is the firm’s responsibility to determine if such filing is necessary. Additional information on this requirement is available from ELEC at 888-313-3532.

8. SECURITY FOR FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE 8.1 Simultaneously with its delivery of the executed contract, the successful bidder shall

deliver to the County an executed bond in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the accepted bid as security for the faithful performance of this contract and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, prepared in the form of contract bond attached hereto and having a surety thereon such surety company or companies as are acceptable on bonds approved by the County, and as are authorized to transact business in this State.


8.2 In the event the successful bidder chooses to supply a Letter of Credit in lieu of the performance bond required by Section 8.1 above, said Letter of Credit shall be delivered to the County simultaneously with the delivery of the executed contract. The Letter of Credit shall be for the full amount of the bid and shall conform to the terms set forth in the terms of Letter of Credit in these specifications. This Letter of Credit option is not available on construction projects exceeding $100,000. Such projects require a Performance Bond. See N.J.S.A. 40A:11-22.

9. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS (Where applicable the following insurance requirements shall apply). 9.1 Workers Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance This insurance shall be maintained in force during the life of the contract and shall cover

all employees engaged in the performance of the contract. This insurance shall comply with all applicable statutes and regulations. Minimum Employer's Liability insurance of $500,000.00.

9.2 General Liability Insurance This insurance shall have limits of not less than $1,000,000.00 per occurrence and

$3,000,000.00 aggregate for bodily injury and property damage and shall be maintained in force during the life of the contract.

9.3 Builders Risk Insurance

This insurance shall cover all building construction, reconstruction, alteration, or related work and shall have limits of not less than the agreed completed value of the project. The coverage shall be written on a replacement cost basis and a copy of such policy shall be provided to the County before construction commences. Coverage shall remain in force until a certificate of occupancy has been issued.

9.4 Automobile Liability Insurance This insurance shall cover the Contractor for claims arising from owned, hired and non-

owned vehicles and shall have limits of not less than $1,000,000.00 per occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. Coverage shall be maintained in force during the life of the contract.

9.5 Insurance Requirements for Subcontractors On any construction, reconstruction, alteration, or similar project, the Contractor shall

require each Subcontractor to carry insurance coverage equal to or exceeding the type and level of coverage required to be carried by the Contractor. This coverage shall be in addition to the coverage carried by the Contractor.

9.6 Certificates of the Required Insurance Certificates for the above listed insurance shall be submitted along with the signed

contract as evidence that such insurance is in force and shall name the County of Camden as additional insured. The notice to proceed and/or purchase order will not


be issued by the County until the certificate of insurance is provided with the signed contract. Such coverage shall be with acceptable insurance companies operating on an admitted basis in the State of New Jersey.

9.7 Cancellation Certificates for the above-listed insurance shall contain a provision that coverage

afforded under the policies will not be cancelled without at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to the County of Camden.

10. INDEMNIFICATION 10.1 The contractor shall assume all risk of and responsibility for, and agrees to indemnify, defend, and save harmless the County of Camden and its officials and employees from and against any and all claims, demands, suits, actions, recoveries, judgments and costs and expenses in connection therewith on account of the loss of life, property or injury or damage to the person, body or property of any person or persons whatsoever, which shall arise from or result directly or indirectly from the work and/or materials supplied under this contract. This indemnification obligation is not limited by but is in addition to the insurance obligations contained in this agreement. 11. AWARD 11.1 Award of contract will be made by the Camden County Board of Chosen Freeholders

within sixty (60) days after the bid opening or within the time allowed by law. 11.2 Upon award of the contract, appropriate documents shall be forwarded to the successful

bidder. N.J.S.A. 40A:11-24(b) requires the contract to be signed by all parties within the time set forth in the specifications, which shall not exceed twenty-one (21) days, Sundays and holidays excepted, after the making of the award. At the expiration of such time, the County may elect to award the bid to the next lowest responsible bidder and accept as liquidated damages the bid security.

12. QUANTITIES 12.1 Quantities shown are approximate and the Board reserves the right to increase or

decrease them to the extent of twenty percent (20%) at the unit price bid. If the number of units in the total is less than ten (10), the County shall have the right to increase or decrease the quantity to not more than ten (10) or less than one at same unit price. Such change, however, will only be upon the written order of the County.

13. PREVAILING WAGE ACT / CERTIFIED PAYROLL SUBMISSIONS 13.1 Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 34:11-56.25 et seq., P.L. 2009, c.249, and as amended, successful

bidders on projects for public work shall adhere to all requirements of the New Jersey Prevailing Wage Act.

13.2 The contractor on any public works project for the County shall be required to submit a

certified payroll record to the County Department administering said public works project. Such certified payroll record must be submitted within ten (10) days of the payment of the wages. The contractor is also responsible for obtaining and submitting all


subcontractors' certified payroll records within the aforementioned time period. The contractor shall submit said certified payrolls in the form set forth in N.J.A.C. 12:60 Appendix A. It will be the contractor's responsibility to obtain any additional copies of the certified payroll form to be submitted by contacting the Office of Administrative Law, CN 049, Trenton, New Jersey 08625 or the New Jersey Department of Labor, Division of Workplace Standards.

14. METHOD OF AWARD 14.1 For goods and services contracts the County may award the work based on the lowest

responsible Base Bid or may elect to award the work based on the line items or unit prices, whichever is in the best interest of the County.

14.2 For construction contracts, the County will award the contract to the lowest responsible

bidder whose base bid is the lowest. 14.3 If Alternates are provided for in the bid and the County determines it has sufficient funds

to award some or all of the Alternates, the lowest responsible Base Bid combined with such Alternates as selected will be awarded until a net amount is reached which is within the funds available. Alternate(s) may also be deferred and awarded at a later date in the sole discretion of the County. The cost of any Alternate(s) included in the bid shall not be combined with the Base Bid for purposes of determining the lowest responsible bidder for award of contract.

15. TERM OF CONTRACT 15.1 The term of the contract to be awarded as the result of this bid shall be for one (1) year

from the date of execution of the agreement unless otherwise stated. 16. TERMINATION 16.1 The County may terminate the agreement for any reason upon thirty (30) days written

notice to the contractor. The County shall only be responsible for payment up to the effective date of termination.

17. AMERICAN GOODS AND PRODUCTS TO BE USED WHERE AVAILABLE 17.1 Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11-18, only manufactured and farm products of the United

States wherever available, shall be used in the execution of the work or supply of goods as specified herein.

18. AVAILABILITY OF FUNDS 18.1 Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11-15 any contract resulting from this bid shall be subject to

the availability and appropriation of sufficient funds annually. 19. PURCHASING FROM STATE CONTRACT 19.1 The County reserves the right to purchase, during the term of any contract to be

awarded, any of the specified materials and/or services through the New Jersey State Cooperative Purchasing Agreement (State Contract) if it is in the County's best interest to do so.


20. BRAND NAMES AND/OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 20.1 Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11-13, brand names and/or descriptions used in this

specification for bid proposal are to acquaint prospective bidders with the type of equipment (or commodity) described and will be used as a standard by which alternate or competitive materials offered will be judged. Competitive items must be equal to the standard described and be of the same reputation for quality and workmanship. Variations between the equipment described and material offered are to be fully explained by the bidder in an accompanying letter. In the absence of any changes by the bidder, it will be presumed and required that materials as described in these specifications be delivered.

It is recognized that no two pieces of equipment and no two products are engineered or designed the same. Trade names, brand names and models specified herein are provided to establish a minimum standard of quality acceptable to the County for this bid. Substitute brands, makes and models shall be considered and reviewed based on its ability to perform the specified tasks or provide the same quality of goods as specified in the County's bid. This is known as an "Equivalent".

If the bidder seeks to provide an Equivalent product or good, the bidder shall with its bid, submit specifications or cut sheets for such proposed Equivalent product or good. The County's Architect/Engineer, or specifications writer, for the bid shall review the submission provided by the bidder to determine whether the product or good is an Equivalent to the bid specification. The County's Architect/Engineer or specifications writer shall have the final decision on whether a bidder's submitted product specifications are an Equivalent to the named product(s) or good(s) in the bid.

21. WORKER AND COMMUNITY RIGHT TO KNOW 21.1 The successful bidder shall comply with all provisions of the Worker and Community

Right to Know Act, N.J.S.A. 34:5A-1 et seq., as well as the regulations under the Act (N.J.A.C. 8:59-1.1 et seq.).

22. COOPERATIVE PRICING 22.1 If this bid is being issued under the Camden County Cooperative Pricing System,

System Identifier No. 57-CCCPS, then each bidder must read the Rules and Instructions for Bids Under the Camden County Cooperative Pricing System attached hereto and indicate on Exhibit L whether its bid proposal is extended or not extended to registered system members (other agencies) by checking the appropriate box.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: A bidder's failure to complete Exhibit L in the case of a bid

for the Camden County Cooperative Pricing System shall be deemed to be an extension of prices by that bidder to registered system members (other agencies).

23. BIDS FOR THE PURCHASE OF TEXTILES AND ITEMS OF APPAREL In accordance with Resolution No. 55 of the Camden County Board of Chosen Freeholders

adopted on May 21, 1998, the following terms and conditions shall apply to all bids for the purchase of textiles and/or items of apparel:


23.1 Disclosure of all subcontractors and sites Each bidder shall set forth in Exhibit M of its bid response the name and address of

each subcontractor to be used in the provision of the goods or services which are the subject of this bid. Additionally, each bidder shall set forth in Exhibit M of its bid the name and address of all locations, including subcontractor locations, substantially involved in the production of the goods or services which are the subject of this bid. Such information shall be considered public information.

23.2 Certification of Compliance. Bidders shall certify in Exhibit M that each location, including subcontractor locations,

substantially involved in producing or distributing such goods meet the following standards:

a. Compensation. Wage and benefit levels must be sufficient to meet basic needs and provide some discretionary income for a family of 4 (a "living wage"). For employment within the United States, this shall mean wages of at least $7 per hour in 1997 dollars, along with affordable family health benefits and company-paid pension benefits typical of responsible employers.

b. Rights. The company respects workers' rights to speak up about working conditions without fear of retaliation, and to form unions of their own choosing without employer resistance. Due process and just cause procedures are used for discipline or discharge. The company complies with all laws, regulations, and ILO standards governing the workplace. The company does not use child labor, forced labor, or corporal punishment. The company does not discriminate in hiring, promotion or compensation based on race, national origin, religion, gender, sexual preference, union affiliation, or political affiliation.

c. Safety and Health. The company provides a safe and healthy work environment. 23.3 Correction and remediation of violations; Proof of compliance

The County may, at its discretion, require correction and remediation of violations of the standards listed above prior to renewing commerce with the contractor. The County may require further proof of compliance with the aforementioned standards. Upon the County's request, the contractor or subcontractor shall make all relevant records available to the County or its designee.

24. COMPLIANCE WITH PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION ACT The bidder shall comply with The Public Works Contractor Registration Act, P.L. 1999, c. 238 on all bids for public works as defined in the law. Proof of compliance with this law, when applicable, must be submitted prior to award of contract. The bidder and its named specialty trade sub-contractor(s) listed in Exhibit N (see below), shall provide proof of compliance prior to award of contract or bid will be rejected as non-compliant. Questions regarding this law may be directed to the New Jersey Department of Labor and Workforce Development, Contractor Registration Unit at 609-292-9464. The County strongly recommends that each bidder provide its public works contractor registration certificate (and certificates for each Exhibit N subcontractor) with submission of bids.


25. REQUEST FOR TAXPAYER IDENTIFICATION NUMBER AND CERTIFICATION Upon execution of the contract with the County, the successful bidder shall be required to complete and submit IRS Form W-9, Request For Taxpayer Identification Number And Certification to the County’s Division of Accounts Payable, 520 Market Street, 10th Floor, Camden, New Jersey 08102. This requirement shall only apply to the successful bidder. Failure by the successful bidder to meet this requirement shall result in the County withholding such funds as required by IRS regulations. 26. BIDS FOR CONSTRUCTION/DISCLOSURE OF SUBCONTRACTORS 26.1 Definition of Construction Bid.

“Construction” means construction, alteration or repair of any public building when the entire cost of the work will exceed the bid threshold. In addition to construction bids, the County specifically requires that bidders identify all subcontractors in specialty trade categories for all bids where such specialty trades may be required (see below and Section 35).

26.2 Disclosure of Subcontractors.

a. Bidders must list in Exhibit N, all subcontractors that they intend to use in the specialty trade categories of: Plumbing and Gas Fitting, and All Kindred Work; Steam Power Plants, Steam and Hot Water Heating and Ventilating Apparatus, and All Kindred Work; Electrical Work; and Structural Steel and Ornamental Iron Work, as required to be listed by N.J.S.A. 40A:11-16. FAILURE TO LIST THESE REQUIRED SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL BE CAUSE FOR REJECTION OF BID. Bidders with questions regarding this process should consult their counsel.

b. Substitution of subcontractors shall be permitted only in cases of impossibility, e.g., the death of the subcontractor or where the subcontractor goes out of business.

c. The bidder’s proposal will be rejected if the subcontractors listed do not comply with the requirements for the designated work tasks.

d. A general contractor that intends to utilize a specific subcontractor to perform work in one or more of the above-referenced specialty trade categories set forth in N.J.S.A. 40A:11-16 (See Exhibit N), shall provide the required information about that subcontractor in the appropriate spaces for each specialty trade category applicable to the contract. A general contractor that intends to perform work in one or more of the above-referenced specialty trade categories set forth in N.J.S.A. 40A:11-16 (See Exhibit N) through the use of its own employees or the general contractor himself rather than through utilization of a subcontractor shall write the word “In-House” next to each applicable category and then insert the name, and the license number where required, of each such employee of the general contractor or the general contractor himself in the appropriate spaces for each specialty trade category applicable to the contract. If the contract does not involve any of the above-referenced specialty trade categories set forth in N.J.S.A. 40A:11-16, the contractor shall insert the word “None” in each appropriate space provided.


e. If the bidder proposes to perform plumbing, gas fitting and all kindred work with its own personnel, it shall follow the requirements of N.J.S.A. 45:14C-1 et seq. and N.J.A.C. 13:32-1.1 et seq.

f. If the bidder proposes to perform electrical work with its own personnel, it shall follow the requirements of N.J.S.A. 45:5A-1 et seq. and N.J.A.C. 13:31-1.1 et seq.

27. SIGNIFICANT PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS

By Resolution No. 71 adopted June 17, 2004, the Board of Chosen Freeholders of the County of Camden (Board) set the following bid specification requirements for significant County public works projects:

a. “Significant Public Works Project” means construction, reconstruction, demolition,

alteration, or repair work, or maintenance work, including painting and decorating, done under contract and paid for in whole or in part out of Camden County funds which equal or exceed the sum of $25,000.00, which sum shall be adjusted in accordance with the bid threshold provision of N.J.S.A. 40A:11-3 as amended from time to time.

b. All bids on significant public works projects shall include an apprenticeship program in

the appropriate trade(s), registered in the State of New Jersey, with the United States Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or contain a statement of agreement not to employ any worker of less than journeyman status on the project; and

c. A detailed statement of compliance shall be completed by the bidder and the specialty

trade subcontractors set forth in Paragraph 26 above and identified in Exhibit N and submitted as a material requirement of the bid for the bid to be accepted. This statement shall be made in Exhibit O. Additionally, the successful bidder must submit a detailed statement of compliance as set forth in Exhibit O for all other subcontractors prior to the commencement of work by said subcontractors.

d. The County of Camden may refuse to award a contract to a person or entity submitting a

bid or proposal if that person or entity has filed or submitted false information or failed to file or submit the information required by Resolution No. 71 adopted by the Board on June 17, 2004. The County may require further proof of compliance with the standards set forth above. Upon request, the contractor shall make all relevant records available to the County or its designee.

28. NO DAMAGES FOR DELAY Extension of the contract time shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any: (1) delay in the

commencement, prosecution or completion of the work; (2) hindrance or obstruction in the performance of the work; (3) loss of productivity; or (4) other similar claims whether or not such delays are foreseeable, unless such delay is due to the County’s negligence, bad faith, active interference, tortious conduct or other reasons uncontemplated by the parties that delay the contractor’s performance, in accordance with the provisions of N.J.S.A. 40A:11-16.7. The aforementioned shall apply to any contract awarded as the result of this bid including but not limited to contracts for construction, goods, or services.


29. ALTERNATIVE DISPUTE RESOLUTION For construction contracts, as defined in N.J.S.A. 40A:11-50, disputes arising under the contract

shall be submitted to mediation or non-binding arbitration pursuant to industry standards prior to being submitted to a court for adjudication.

30. COMPLIANCE WITH THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT The successful bidder shall comply with the mandatory language of the Americans With

Disabilities Act as set forth in Exhibit P attached hereto. 31. COMPLIANCE WITH CONTRACTOR BUSINESS REGISTRATION PROGRAM Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 52:32-44, Camden County is prohibited from entering into a contract with an entity unless the bidder/proposer/contractor, and each subcontractor that is required by law to be named in a bid/proposal/contract has a valid Business Registration Certificate on file with the Division of Revenue and Enterprise Services within the Department of the Treasury. Prior to contract award or authorization, the contractor shall provide the Contracting Agency with its proof of business registration and that of any named subcontractor(s). Subcontractors named in a bid or proposal shall provide proof of business registration to the bidder, who in turn, shall provide it to the Contracting Agency prior to the time of contract, purchase order, or other contracting document is awarded or authorized. During the course of contract performance:

(1) The contractor shall not enter into a contract with a subcontractor unless the subcontractor first provides the contractor with a valid proof of business registration.

(2) The contractor shall maintain and submit to the Contracting Agency a list of subcontractors and their addresses that may be updated from time to time.

(3) The contractor and any subcontractor providing goods or performing services under the contract, and each of their affiliates, shall collect and remit to the Director of the Division of Taxation in the Department of Treasury, the use tax due pursuant to the Sales and Use Tax Act, (N.J.S.A. 54:32B-1 et seq.) on all sales of tangible personal property delivered in the State. Any questions in this regard can be directed to the Division of Taxation at (609) 292-6400. Form NJ-REG can be filed online at www.state.nj.us/treasury/revenue/busregcert.shtml.

Before final payment is made under the contract, the contractor shall submit to the Contracting Agency a complete and accurate list of all subcontractors used and their addresses. Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 54:49-4.1, a business organization that fails to provide a copy of a business registration as required, or that provides false business registration information, shall be liable for a penalty of $25 for each day of violation, not to exceed $50,000, for each proof of business registration not properly provided under a contract with a contracting agency. The County strongly recommends that each bidder provide its BRC (and BRC’s for each subcontractor) with submission of bids.

http://www.state.nj.us/treasury/revenue/busregcert.shtml


32. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF RECEIPT OF ADDENDA

The bidder shall complete, sign and return with bid Exhibit Q attached hereto. Form must be completed and returned with bid regardless of whether addenda were issued by the County.

33. UNIFORMED LAW ENFORCEMENT OFFICERS REQUIREMENT FORM

Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11-23.1(c) if uniformed law enforcement officers are required for the project, Exhibit R will be completed by the County and indicate a good faith estimate of the total cost of traffic control personnel, vehicles, equipment, administrative, or any other costs associated with additional traffic control requirements as determined by the County with input from any other public entity affected by the project. These estimated amounts reflect those costs above and beyond the bidder’s traffic control costs.

34. APPROVAL AND CERTIFICATION OF BILLING

Authorization for payment of periodic billing, final payments or retainage monies requires approval and certification by formal resolution of the Camden County Board of Chosen


Freeholders. Pursuant to P.L. 2006, c. 96, all billing amounts due under a contract with the successful bidder and all required purchasing documents must be received at least ten (10) days in advance of the next scheduled public meeting of Board of Freeholders for the month in which payment is requested. Approved and certified amounts due will be paid during the County’s subsequent payment cycle.

35. PROPRIETARY GOODS ____ County to Check if applicable

If checked off above, the goods set forth in the technical specifications have been certified as proprietary goods in accordance with the Local Public Contracts Law, N.J.S.A. 40A:11-1 et seq. No substitutions or equivalents will be accepted. Please see the technical specifications attached hereto.

36. CONTRACTS WHERE ASPHALT WORK IS INCLUDED IN SPECIFICATIONS P.L. 2015, c.201 requires the inclusion of a pay item for an asphalt price adjustment for any

bid specification that includes the purchase or use of hot mix asphalt; provides for application of a fuel price adjustment where a pay item is eligible (see NJDOT Section 160.03.01, where applicable); for contracts issued for more than 1,000 tons, requires the price adjustment pay item be applied to each ton of hot mix asphalt purchased and used, not just the tonnage exceeding the 1,000 ton threshold; clarifies that the term “hot mix asphalt” includes equivalent asphalt cement-based products (e.g. warm mix asphalt); prohibits disaggregation of quantities to avoid compliance with P.L. 2015, c.201.

37. Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11-16.6, all construction contracts issued by the County when the

total price of the originally awarded contract equals or exceed $5,000,000.00, shall allow for value engineering construction change orders to be approved after the award of the contract.

38. PERMISSION FOR BIDDER TO WITHDRAW A PUBLIC WORKS BID DUE TO A MISTAKE IN CERTAIN CIRCUMSTANCES

Effective March 4, 2011, N.J.S.A. 40A:11-23.3 authorizes a bidder to request withdrawal of a public works bid due to a mistake on the part of the bidder. A mistake is defined by N.J.S.A. 40A:11-2(42) as a clerical error that is an unintentional and substantial computational error or an unintentional omission of a substantial quantity of labor, material, or both, from the final bid computation. A bidder claiming a mistake under N.J.S.A. 40A:11-23.3 must submit a request for withdrawal, in writing, by certified or registered mail to the Camden County Purchasing Agent, 520 Market Street, 17th Floor, Camden, New Jersey, 08102. Written requests must be provided within five business days after the receipt and opening of the bids. The bid withdrawal shall be effective as of the postmark of the certified or registered mailing.

A bidder’s request to withdraw the bid shall contain evidence, including any pertinent documents, demonstrating that a mistake was made. Such documents and relevant written information shall be reviewed and evaluated by the public owner’s designated staff pursuant to the statutory criteria of N.J.S.A. 40A:11-23.3. The County will not consider any written request for a bid withdrawal for a mistake as defined by N.J.S.A. 40A:11-2(42), by a bidder in the preparation of a bid proposal unless the postmark of the certified or registered mailing is within five business days following the opening of bids.


If a bidder is granted a bid withdrawal, the bidder shall be disqualified from future bidding on the same project, including whenever all bids are rejected pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11-13.2

39. N.J.A.C. § 17:44-2.2 AUTHORITY TO AUDIT OR REVIEW CONTRACT RECORDS (a) Relevant records of private vendors or other persons entering in to contracts with covered entities are subject to audit or review by OSC pursuant to N.J.S.A. 52:15C- 14(d).

(b) As of November 15, 2010, all covered entities shall insert the following language in any new contract: "(The contract partner) shall maintain all documentation related to products, transactions or services under this contract for a period of five years from the date of final payment. Such records shall be made available to the New Jersey Office of the State Comptroller upon request."

40. NEW JERSEY ANTI-DISCRIMINATION PROVISIONS: N.J.S.A. 10:2-1 et seq. If awarded a contract, the contractor agrees to abide by the New Jersey anti- discrimination provisions contained in N.J.S.A. 10:2-1 et seq. See Exhibit T.

END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS / EXHIBITS BEGIN ON NEXT PAGE


EXHIBIT A SAMPLE FORM OF BID BOND

A. We, the undersigned

____________________________________________________________ as Principal and

______________________________________ as Surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto

_____________________________ in the penal sum of __________________Dollars

($_______________), lawful money of the United States for the payment of which well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. Signed this ___________ day of ____________, 20 ______.

B. THE CONDITION of the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to

the_________________________________________________, a certain bid attached hereto and hereby made a part of hereto and hereby made a part of hereof,

to enter in to a contract in writing for the (insert type of work) ____________________________________________________________________. C. NOW THEREFORE: If said bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, if said bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall

execute and deliver a contract in the form of Agreement required by the Bid Documents and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said bid. Then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect, it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.

D. THE SURETY for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety

and its bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by an extension of the time within the "OBLIGEE" may accept such bid. And said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension.

E. IN WITNESS, WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals,

and such of them as corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto fixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers, the day and year set forth above.

____________________________________(L.S.) PRINCIPAL

____________________________________ SURETY

(SEAL) ____________________________________ BY NOTE: Bid Bond must be signed by an authorized agent or representative of a surety

company and not by the individual or company submitting the bid.


EXHIBIT B SAMPLE FORM OF CONSENT OF SURETY BOND NO._____________________________ (INSERT YOUR BOND NO. HERE) The ___________________________________, a Corporation organized and (NAME OF YOUR INSURANCE COMPANY) existing under the laws of the State of ______________________________, and licensed to do business in the State of New Jersey, hereby consents and agrees that if the contract for: ________________ (INSERT BID NO.) ________________________________________________________________________AND ITEMS WHICH YOU ARE BIDDING). be awarded to _______________________________________________. (NAME OF YOUR COMPANY) the undersigned Corporation agrees with the said County of Camden, Courthouse, 520 Market Street, Camden, New Jersey 08102 to execute the final bond as required by the specifications and to become the surety in the full amount of the price bid for the faithful performance of the contract. In Witness, Whereof, the undersigned Corporation has caused this agreement to be signed by its duly authorized representative and its Corporate Seal to be hereto affixed this________________ day of _____________________, 20 ____. The_______________________________ (NAME OF INSURANCE COMPANY) By _______________________________ (ATTORNEY-IN-FACT) Countersigned by: NOTE: Consent of Surety must be signed by an authorized agent or

representative of a surety company and not by the individual or company submitting the bid.


EXHIBIT C

SAMPLE FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND We, the Undersigned _________________________________________________________________________ as Principal, and____________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________ a Corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of________________________ and authorized to do business in the State of New Jersey as surety are held and firmly bound unto ____________________________hereinafter called the Owner as hereinafter set forth, in the full and just several sums of (a)__________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________Dollars ($________________) for faithful performance of the contract as hereinafter designated in Paragraph "A" and (b)__________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________Dollars ($_______________) for payment of labor and material as hereinafter designated in Paragraph "B" and (c)__________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________Dollars ($_______________) for maintenance as hereinafter designated in Paragraph "C"; lawful money of the United States of America; to be paid to the Owner, or its Assigns, to which payment well and truly to be made and done, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. Sealed with our respective seals and dated this __________day of _____________________________, 20 . WHEREAS, the above bonded Principal has entered into a contract with the Owner dated the ________________day of _________________________, 20 for___________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________

upon certain terms and conditions in said contract more particularly mentioned; and WHEREAS, it is one of the conditions of the award of the Owner pursuant to which said contract is about to be entered into, that these presents be executed.


(Sample Form of Performance Bond – continued) NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH: A. That if the Principal shall faithfully perform the contract on its part to be performed according to the terms of said contract, or any changes or modifications therein made as therein provided; and shall indemnify and save harmless the party of the first part mentioned in the contract aforesaid, its officers, agents and servants, and each and every one of them against and from all suits and costs of every kind and description and from all damages which the said party of the first part in said contract mentioned, or any of its officers, agents or servants may be put by reason of injury to the person or property of others resulting from the performance of said work or through the negligence of the said party of the second part to said contract, or through any improper or defective machinery, implements or appliances used by the said party of the second part in the aforesaid work or through any act or omission on the part of the said party of the second part of its agents, servants or employees, and shall further indemnify and save harmless the party of the first part mentioned in the contract aforesaid its officers, agents and servants from all suits and actions of any kind or character whatsoever, which may be brought or instituted by any subcontractor, materialman or laborer who has performed work or furnished materials in or about the work required to be done pursuant to the said contract or by or on account of, any claims or amount recovered for any infringement of patent, trademark, or copyright; then this part of this obligation designated as part "A" shall be void; otherwise the same shall remain in full force and effect, it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the surety for any and all claims hereunder shall in no event exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. B. That if the said Principal shall pay all lawful claims of subcontractors, materialmen, laborers, persons, firms or corporations for labor performed or materials, provisions, provender or other supplies or items, fuels, oils, implements or machinery furnished, used or consumed in the carrying forward, performing or completing of said contract; we agreeing and assenting that this undertaking shall be for the benefit of any subcontractor, materialman, laborer, person, firm or corporation having a just claim, as well as for the obligee herein; whether or not the said material and labor enter into and become component parts of the work or improvement or in any amendment, extension or addition to said contract, then this part of this obligation designated part "B", shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in full force and effect. C. That if the said Principal shall well and truly keep and perform all the obligations, agreements, terms, and conditions of such contract, on the Principal's part to be kept and performed and said Principal shall be responsible for poor workmanship done or poor materials furnished under said contract for a period of one year from the date of the completion and final acceptance by the party of the first part and mentioned in the contract, and said Principal shall pay for all labor performed and furnished and for all materials used in correcting any poor workmanship done and replacing any poor materials furnished, then this part of this obligation designated part "C", shall be void; otherwise the same shall remain in full force and effect. It is further agreed that any alterations which may be made in the terms of the contract or in the work to be done or materials to be furnished or labor to be supplied or performed under it or the giving by the Owner of any extension of time for the performance of the Contract or the reduction of the retained percentages as permitted by the Contract or any other forbearance on the part of either the Owner or the Principal to the other, shall not in any way release the Principal and the


(Sample Form of Performance Bond – continued)

Surety or Sureties or either or any of them, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, from their liability hereunder, notice to the Surety or Sureties of any alterations, extension or forbearance being hereby waived. It is further agreed that in case of default in, and/or any action arising out of rights and liabilities secured by this obligation or any part hereto or any person claiming by or through it, either may use for the purpose of establishing its, or their claim, a copy of this obligation certified by the Owner, and the action, or actions, if any, arising on the within bond, shall not be a bar to any subsequent action that may arise through any liability incurred in any other action herein, and based upon any other part of this obligation. IN WITNESS, WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have duly executed this bond under their seals the day and year above written. If Principal is an individual: Witness: ___________________________ By____________________(SEAL) _______________________ Surety ___________________________ By______________________ Attorney-in-fact (Corporate Seal) If Principal is a partnership: _________________________ Witness: Principal

__________________________ _______________________(SEAL) Partner __________________________ ________________________(SEAL) Partner _________________________ Surety By________________________ Attorney-in-fact (Corporate Seal)


(Sample Form of Performance Bond – continued) If Principal is a corporation: __________________________ Attest: Principal ___________________________ By_________________________ Secretary President Corporate Seal: Attest: ___________________________ __________________________ __________________________ By________________________ Attorney-in-fact (Corporate Seal) Approved as to Form_______________,20_____ __________________________________________ Assistant County Counsel


EXHIBIT D SAMPLE FORM OF TERMS OF LETTER OF CREDIT 1. AMOUNT: The amount of this letter of credit shall be for the sum of ____________________.

(Amount of Contract)

2. TERM: The term of this letter of credit shall be in effect and irrevocable for a period

commencing on the date of execution of the agreement between the County of Camden

and________________________________________________.

(Name of Contractor)

and terminating one (1) year after the date of completion and final acceptance by the

County of the work performed pursuant to Camden County Bid No.:

_____________________________________________________________.

(Bid No. and description of services/material to be provided)

3. CAUSES FOR PROCEEDING AGAINST LETTER OF CREDIT: The County shall have the

absolute right to proceed against this letter of credit if:

(a) Contractor shall fail to faithfully perform according to the terms of the contract and

Camden County Bid No.______________, or any changes or modifications therein made as therein

provided; or Contractor shall fail to indemnify and save harmless the County of Camden, its officers,

agents and servants, and each and every one of them against and from all suits and costs of every kind

and description and from all damages which the County, or any of its officers, agents or servants may

be put by reason of injury to the person or property of others resulting from the performance of said

work or through the negligence of Contractor, or through any improper or defective machinery,

implements or appliances used by contractor in the aforesaid work or through any act or omission on

the part of Contractor, its agents, servants or employees; or contractor shall fail to further indemnify and

save harmless the County, its officers, agents and servants from all suits and actions of any kind or

character whatsoever, which may be brought or instituted by any subcontractors, materialman or

laborer who has performed work or furnished materials in or about the work required to be done

pursuant to said contract, or by or on account of, any claims or amount recovered for any infringement

of patent, trademark, or copyright; or _____________________________________

(Name of Bank)


agreeing and assenting that this undertaking shall be for the benefit of any subcontractor, materialman,

laborer, person, firm or corporation having a just claim, as well as for the County of Camden, whether or

not the said material and labor enter into and become component parts of the work or improvement or

in any amendment, extension or addition to said contract; or

(b) Contractor shall fail to pay all lawful sums of subcontractors, materialman, laborers,

persons, firms or corporations for labor performed or materials, provisions, provender or other supplies

or teams, fuels, oils, implements or machinery furnished, used or consumed in the carrying forward,

performing or completing of said contract; or

(c) Contractor shall fail to well and truly keep and perform all the obligations, agreements,

terms and conditions of such contract, on its part to be kept and performed and Contractor shall be

responsible for poor workmanship done or poor materials furnished under said contract for a period of

one (1) year from the date of the completion and final acceptance by the County of Camden, and

Contractor shall pay for all labor performed and furnished and for all materials used in correcting any

poor workmanship done and replacing any poor materials furnished.

It is further agreed that any alterations which may be made in the terms of the contract

or in the work to be done or materials to be furnished or labor to be supplied or performed under it or the

giving by the County of Camden of any extension of time for the performance of the contract shall not in

any way release Contractor, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, from its liability

hereunder.

NOTE: Letter of Credit must be signed by an authorized agent or

representative of a bank or similar financial institution and not by the individual or company submitting the bid.


EXHIBIT E STATEMENT OF OWNERSHIP DISCLOSURE

N.J.S.A. 52:25-24.2 (P.L. 1977, c.33, as amended by P.L. 2016, c.43)

This statement shall be completed, certified to, and included with all Bid and Competitive Contracting RFP submissions. Failure to submit the required information is cause for automatic rejection of the bid or proposal.

Name of Organization:________________________________________________________ Organization Address:_________________________________________________________ Part I Check the box that represents the type of business organization: Sole Proprietorship (skip Parts II and III, execute certification in Part IV)

Non-Profit Corporation (skip Parts II and III, execute certification in Part IV)

For-Profit Corporation (any type) Limited Liability Company (LLC)

Partnership Limited Partnership Limited Liability Partnership (LLP)

Other (be specific): ______________________________________________ Part II The list below contains the names and HOME addresses of all individual stockholders in the

corporation who own 10 percent or more of its stock, of any class, or of all individual partners in the partnership who own a 10 percent or greater interest therein, or of all members in the limited liability company who own a 10 percent or greater interest therein. (COMPLETE THE LIST BELOW IN THIS SECTION)

OR No one stockholder in the corporation owns 10 percent or more of its stock, of any class, or

no individual partner in the partnership owns a 10 percent or greater interest therein, or no member in the limited liability company owns a 10 percent or greater interest therein. (SKIP TO PART IV)

(Please attach additional sheets if more space is needed):

Name of Individual or Business Entity Must list Home Address for Individuals


Part III DISCLOSURE OF 10% OR GREATER OWNERSHIP IN THE STOCKHOLDERS, PARTNERS OR LLC MEMBERS LISTED IN PART II If a bidder has a direct or indirect parent entity which is publicly traded, and any person holds a 10 percent or greater beneficial interest in the publicly traded parent entity as of the last annual federal Security and Exchange Commission (SEC) or foreign equivalent filing, ownership disclosure can be met by providing links to the website(s) containing the last annual filing(s) with the federal Securities and Exchange Commission (or foreign equivalent) that contain the name and address of each person holding a 10% or greater beneficial interest in the publicly traded parent entity, along with the relevant page numbers of the filing(s) that contain the information on each such person. Attach additional sheets if more space is needed.

Website (URL) containing the last annual SEC (or foreign equivalent) filing Page #’s Please list the names and HOME addresses of each stockholder, partner or member owning a 10 percent or greater interest in any corresponding corporation, partnership and/or limited liability company (LLC) listed in Part II other than for any publicly traded parent entities referenced above. The disclosure shall be continued until names and addresses of every noncorporate stockholder, and individual partner, and member exceeding the 10 percent ownership criteria established pursuant to N.J.S.A. 52:25-24.2 has been listed. Attach additional sheets if more space is needed.

Stockholder/Partner/Member and Corresponding Entity Listed in Part II

Home Address (for Individuals) Business Address (for Corporate Entity)

Part IV Certification I, being duly sworn upon my oath, hereby represent that the foregoing information and any attachments thereto to the best of my knowledge are true and complete. I acknowledge: that I am authorized to execute this certification on behalf of the bidder/proposer; that Camden County is relying on the information contained herein and that I am under a continuing obligation from the date of this certification through the completion of any contracts with Camden County to notify Camden County in writing of any changes to the information contained herein; that I am aware that it is a criminal offense to make a false statement or misrepresentation in this certification, and if I do so, I am subject to criminal prosecution under the law and that it will constitute a material breach of my agreement(s) with Camden County permitting Camden County to declare any contract(s) resulting from this certification void and unenforceable.

Full Name (Print): Title:

Signature: Date:


EXHIBIT F NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF ) COUNTY OF )

I, of the City of in the County of,

and the State of of full age, being dully sworn according to law on my oath depose and say

that: I am of the firm of the bidder making this Proposal for the above named project,

and that I executed the said Proposal with full authority to do so; that said bidder had not, directly or

indirectly, entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in

restraint of free, competitive bidding in connection with the above named project; and that all

statements contained in said Proposal and in this affidavit are true and correct, and made with full

knowledge that the State of New Jersey relies upon the truth of the statements contained in said

Proposal and in the statements contained in this affidavit in awarding the contract for the said project.

I further warrant that no person or selling agency has been employed or retained to solicit or secure

such contract upon an agreement or understanding for a commission, percentage, brokerage or

contingent fee, except bona fide employees or bona fide established commercial or selling agencies

maintained by_________________________________________________ (N.J.S.A. 52:34-15)

(Name of Contractor)

Subscribed and sworn to before me this _____ day _____________________________________ of ________________, 20__ (Also type or print name of bidder _____________________________ under signature) Notary Public


EXHIBIT G

MANDATORY EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY LANGUAGE N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq. (P.L. 1975, C. 127)

N.J.A.C. 17:27

GOODS, PROFESSIONAL SERVICE AND GENERAL SERVICE CONTRACTS During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex. Except with respect to affectional or sexual orientation and gender identity or expression, the contractor will ensure that equal employment opportunity is afforded to such applicants in recruitment and employment, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex. Such equal employment opportunity shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the Public Agency Compliance Officer setting forth provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex. The contractor or subcontractor will send to each labor union, with which it has a collective bargaining agreement, a notice, to be provided by the agency contracting officer, advising the labor union of the contractor's commitments under this chapter and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, agrees to comply with any regulations promulgated by the Treasurer pursuant to N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq., as amended and supplemented from time to time and the Americans with Disabilities Act. The contractor or subcontractor agrees to make good faith efforts to meet targeted county employment goals established in accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27-5.2. The contractor or subcontractor agrees to inform in writing its appropriate recruitment agencies including, but not limited to, employment agencies, placement bureaus, colleges, universities, and labor unions, that it does not discriminate on the basis of age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex, and that it will discontinue the use of any recruitment agency which engages in direct or indirect discriminatory practices. The contractor or subcontractor agrees to revise any of its testing procedures, if necessary, to assure that all personnel testing conforms with the principles of job-related testing, as established by


the statutes and court decisions of the State of New Jersey and as established by applicable Federal law and applicable Federal court decisions. In conforming with the targeted employment goals, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to review all procedures relating to transfer, upgrading, downgrading and layoff to ensure that all such actions are taken without regard to age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex, consistent with the statutes and court decisions of the State of New Jersey, and applicable Federal law and applicable Federal court decisions. The contractor shall submit to the public agency, after notification of award but prior to execution of a goods and services contract, one of the following three documents: 1. Letter of Federal Affirmative Action Plan Approval 2. Certificate of Employee Information Report 3. Employee Information Report Form AA302 (electronically provided by the Division and distributed to the public agency through the Division’s website at www.state.nj.us/treasury/contract_compliance) The contractor and its subcontractors shall furnish such reports or other documents to the Division of Purchase & Property, CCAU, EEO Monitoring Program as may be requested by the office from time to time in order to carry out the purposes of these regulations, and public agencies shall furnish such information as may be requested by the Division of Public Contracts Equal Employment Opportunity Compliance for conducting a compliance investigation pursuant to N.J.A.C. 17:27-1.1 et seq.


EXHIBIT H MANDATORY EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY LANGUAGE

N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq. (P.L. 1975, C. 127) N.J.A.C. 17:27

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS

During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex. Except with respect to affectional or sexual orientation and gender identity or expression, the contractor will ensure that equal employment opportunity is afforded to such applicants in recruitment and employment, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex. Such equal employment opportunity shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, up-grading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the Public Agency Compliance Officer setting forth provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex. The contractor or subcontractor will send to each labor union, with which it has a collective bargaining agreement, a notice, to be provided by the agency contracting officer, advising the labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitments under this act and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, agrees to comply with any regulations promulgated by the Treasurer, pursuant to N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq., as amended and supplemented from time to time and the Americans with Disabilities Act. When hiring or scheduling workers in each construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to make good faith efforts to employ minority and women workers in each construction trade consistent with the targeted employment goal prescribed by N.J.A.C. 17:27-7.2; provided, however, that the Division may, in its discretion, exempt a contractor or subcontractor from compliance with the good faith procedures prescribed by the following provisions, A, B and C, as long as the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program is satisfied that the contractor or subcontractor is employing workers provided by a union which provides evidence, in accordance with standards prescribed by the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program, that its percentage of active "card carrying" members who are minority and women workers is equal to or greater than the targeted employment goal established in accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27-7.2. The contractor or subcontractor agrees that a good faith effort shall include compliance with the following procedures:


(A) If the contractor or subcontractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for a construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor shall, within three business days of the contract award, seek assurances from the union that it will cooperate with the contractor or subcontractor as it fulfills its affirmative action obligations under this contract and in accordance with the rules promulgated by the Treasurer pursuant to N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et. seq., as supplemented and amended from time to time and the Americans with Disabilities Act. If the contractor or subcontractor is unable to obtain said assurances from the construction trade union at least five business days prior to the commencement of construction work, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to afford equal employment opportunities minority and women workers directly, consistent with this chapter. If the contractor's or subcontractor's prior experience with a construction trade union, regardless of whether the union has provided said assurances, indicates a significant possibility that the trade union will not refer sufficient minority and women workers consistent with affording equal employment opportunities as specified in this chapter, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to be prepared to provide such opportunities to minority and women workers directly, consistent with this chapter, by complying with the hiring or scheduling procedures prescribed under (B) below; and the contractor or subcontractor further agrees to take said action immediately if it determines that the union is not referring minority and women workers consistent with the equal employment opportunity goals set forth in this chapter. (B) If good faith efforts to meet targeted employment goals have not or cannot be met for each construction trade by adhering to the procedures of (A) above, or if the contractor does not have a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for a construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to take the following actions:

(l) To notify the public agency compliance officer, the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program, and minority and women referral organizations listed by the Division pursuant to N.J.A.C. 17:27-5.3, of its workforce needs, and request referral of minority and women workers; (2) To notify any minority and women workers who have been listed with it as awaiting available vacancies; (3) Prior to commencement of work, to request that the local construction trade union refer minority and women workers to fill job openings, provided the contractor or subcontractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for the construction trade; (4) To leave standing requests for additional referral to minority and women workers with the local construction trade union, provided the contractor or subcontractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for the construction trade, the State Training and Employment Service and other approved referral sources in the area;

(5) If it is necessary to lay off some of the workers in a given trade on the construction site, layoffs shall be conducted in compliance with the equal employment opportunity and non-discrimination standards set forth in this regulation, as well as with applicable Federal and State court decisions;

(6) To adhere to the following procedure when minority and women workers apply or are referred to the contractor or subcontractor: (i) The contactor or subcontractor shall interview the referred minority or women worker.

(ii) If said individuals have never previously received any document or certification signifying a level of qualification lower than that required in order to perform the work of the construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor shall in good faith determine the qualifications of such individuals. The contractor or subcontractor shall hire or schedule those individuals who satisfy appropriate


qualification standards in conformity with the equal employment opportunity and non-discrimination principles set forth in this chapter. However, a contractor or subcontractor shall determine that the individual at least possesses the requisite skills, and experience recognized by a union, apprentice program or a referral agency, provided the referral agency is acceptable to the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program. If necessary, the contractor or subcontractor shall hire or schedule minority and women workers who qualify as trainees pursuant to these rules. All of the requirements, however, are limited by the provisions of (C) below. (iii) The name of any interested women or minority individual shall be maintained on a waiting list and shall be considered for employment as described in (i) above, whenever vacancies occur. At the request of the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program, the contractor or subcontractor shall provide evidence of its good faith efforts to employ women and minorities from the list to fill vacancies. (iv) If, for any reason, said contractor or subcontractor determines that a minority individual or a woman is not qualified or if the individual qualifies as an advanced trainee or apprentice, the contractor or subcontractor shall inform the individual in writing of the reasons for the determination, maintain a copy of the determination in its files, and send a copy to the public agency compliance officer and to the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program. (7) To keep a complete and accurate record of all requests made for the referral of workers in any trade covered by the contract, on forms made available by the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program and submitted promptly to the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program upon request.

(C) The contractor or subcontractor agrees that nothing contained in (B) above shall preclude the contractor or subcontractor from complying with the union hiring hall or apprenticeship policies in any applicable collective bargaining agreement or union hiring hall arrangement, and, where required by custom or agreement, it shall send journeymen and trainees to the union for referral, or to the apprenticeship program for admission, pursuant to such agreement or arrangement. However, where the practices of a union or apprenticeship program will result in the exclusion of minorities and women or the failure to refer minorities and women consistent with the targeted county employment goal, the contractor or subcontractor shall consider for employment persons referred pursuant to (B) above without regard to such agreement or arrangement; provided further, however, that the contractor or subcontractor shall not be required to employ women and minority advanced trainees and trainees in numbers which result in the employment of advanced trainees and trainees as a percentage of the total workforce for the construction trade, which percentage significantly exceeds the apprentice to journey worker ratio specified in the applicable collective bargaining agreement, or in the absence of a collective bargaining agreement, exceeds the ratio established by practice in the area for said construction trade. Also, the contractor or subcontractor agrees that, in implementing the procedures of (B) above, it shall, where applicable, employ minority and women workers residing within the geographical jurisdiction of the union. After notification of award, but prior to signing a construction contract, the contractor shall submit to the public agency compliance officer and the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program an initial project workforce report (Form AA 201) electronically provided to the public agency by the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program, through its website, for distribution to and completion by the contractor, in accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27-7. The contractor also agrees to submit a copy of the Monthly Project Workforce Report once a month thereafter for the duration of this contract to the Division and to the public agency compliance officer. The contractor agrees to cooperate with the public agency in the payment of budgeted funds, as is


necessary, for on-the-job and/or off-the-job programs for outreach and training of minorities and women.

(D) The contractor and its subcontractors shall furnish such reports or other documents to the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program as may be requested by the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program from time to time in order to carry out the purposes of these regulations, and public agencies shall furnish such information as may be requested by the Dept. of LWD, Construction EEO Monitoring Program for conducting a compliance investigation pursuant to N.J.A.C. 17:27-1.1 et seq.


EXHIBIT I QUESTIONNAIRE ON SUPPLY/SERVICE CONTRACTS Please complete this questionnaire and submit it with your bid. Any necessary forms will be sent to you by the County upon award. 1. Our Company has a Federal Affirmative Action Plan Approval. YES___________________ NO____________________ A. If yes, submit a photostatic copy of said approval. B. If no, submit a photostatic copy of the New Jersey Certificate of Employee Information Report. NONE OF THE ABOVE________________ 2. We have neither State nor Federal Affirmative Action evidence. Please send us Form

AA-302 (Affirmative Action Employee Information Report application). (Check if applicable __________).

I certify that the above information is correct to the best of my knowledge. NAME: _______________________________________________________________

SIGNATURE: __________________________________________________________

TITLE: ________________________________________________________________

DATE: ________________________________________________________________ AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER


EXHIBIT J AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN MBE/WBE TRACKING FORM Definitions: A Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) is defined in the Camden County Affirmative Action Plan as "a business which is independently owned and operated and is at least 51% owned and controlled by minority group members". Minority group members are defined in the Camden County Affirmative Action Plan as "persons who are Black, Hispanic, Portuguese, Asian-American, American Indian or Alaskan Natives" A Women Business (WBE) is defined in the Camden County Affirmative Action Plan as "a business which is independently owned and operated and is at least 51% owned and controlled by women". Using the definitions above, please check the following space which best describes your firm: _______ Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) _______ Women Business Enterprise (WBE) _______ Neither


EXHIBIT K CERTIFICATION REGARDING THE DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION - LOWER TIER COVERED TRANSACTIONS I am ___________________________ of the firm of ___________________________, (your title) (name of your organization) _________________________________________________________________. (address of your organization) CHOOSE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING ( ) A. I hereby certify on behalf of _____________________________ that (name of your organization)

neither it nor its principals are debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared

ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction by any federal or state

department, agency, or office.

( ) B. I am unable to certify to any of the statements set forth in this certification. I have

attached an explanation to this form.

___________________________ (Signature) ____________________________ (Type Name & Title) ____________________________ (Date)


INSTRUCTIONS FOR CERTIFICATION 1. By signing and submitting this certification, the contracting firm is providing the certification as

set out below. 2. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was

placed when this transaction was entered into. If it is later determined that the contracting firm knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government and/or State Government, the County may pursue available remedies including suspension and/or debarment.

3. The contracting firm shall provide immediate written notice to the County if at any time, it learns

that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous because of changed circumstances.

4. The terms "covered transaction", "debarred", "suspended", "ineligible", "lower tier covered

transaction", "participant", "person", "primary covered transaction", "principal", and "voluntarily excluded", as used in this clause, have the meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of rules implementing Executive Order 12549. You may contact the County for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations.

5. The contracting firm agrees by submitting this certification that, should the covered transaction

be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction.

6. The contracting firm further agrees by submitting this certification that it will include the clause

titled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion - Lower Tier Covered Transaction," without modification, in all subcontracts to this agreement as authorized by the County.


EXHIBIT L EXTENSION OF PRICES TO REGISTERED SYSTEM MEMBERS (OTHER AGENCIES) The undersigned is further: (ONE BOX ONLY MUST BE CHECKED) WILLING to provide the item(s) herein bid upon to registered system members of the Camden County Cooperative Pricing System, System Identifier No. 57-CCCPS, without substitution or deviation from specifications, size, features, quality, price or availability as herein set forth. It is understood that orders will be placed directly by the registered members identified herein by separate contract, subject to the overall terms of the Master Contract to be awarded by the County of Camden, and that no additional service or delivery charges will be allowed except as permitted by these specifications. NOT WILLING to extend prices to registered system members of the Camden County Cooperative Pricing System, System Identifier No. 57-CCCPS, who have submitted estimates as described above. It is understood that this will not adversely affect consideration of this bid with respect to the needs of Camden County as the Lead Agency.


EXHIBIT M

DISCLOSURE OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SITES AND CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE

(FOR BIDS FOR TEXTILES AND/OR ITEMS OF APPAREL ONLY)

1. DISCLOSURE OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SITES – SEE PARAGRAPH 23.1

a. List the name and address of each subcontractor to be used in the provision of the goods or services which are the subject of this bid. If extra space is required, please attach additional pages as needed. __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

b. List the name and address of all locations, including subcontractor locations, substantially involved in the production of the goods or services which are the subject of this bid. If extra space is required, please attach additional pages as needed. __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE – SEE PARAGRAPH 23.2 I hereby certify that each of the above-referenced locations, including subcontractor locations, substantially involved in producing or distributing the goods or services which are the subject of this bid, meet the standards set forth in Paragraph 23.2 of these specifications. ______________________________________ (Signature) ______________________________________ (Type Name & Title) ______________________________________ (Date)


EXHIBIT N

BIDS FOR CONSTRUCTION DISCLOSURE OF SUBCONTRACTORS

Please list the subcontractors for the specialty trade categories listed below. If you intend to perform the work through your own employees or by yourself rather than through utilization of a subcontractor, write the word “In-House” next to each applicable category and insert the name, and license number where required, of each person in the appropriate spaces. If the contract does not involve a specialty trade listed below, write the word “None” in the appropriate space. For further instructions, see Paragraph 26 herein. DO NOT LEAVE ANY SPACE BLANK.

1. Plumbing and Gas Fitting and All Kindred Work: Name: _____________________________________________________________

Address: ____________________________________________________________ License Number: _____________________________________________________

2. Steam Power Plants, Steam and Hot Water Heating and Ventilating Apparatus, and All Kindred Work:

Name: _____________________________________________________________

Address: ____________________________________________________________ License Number: Not Applicable

3. Electrical Work: Name: _____________________________________________________________

Address: ____________________________________________________________ License Number: _____________________________________________________

4. Structural Steel and Ornamental Iron Work: Name: _____________________________________________________________

Address: ____________________________________________________________ License Number: Not Applicable


EXHIBIT O

AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE WITH INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PARAGRAPH 27 – SIGNIFICANT PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS

NOTE: THE BIDDER AND EACH SPECIALTY TRADE SUBCONTRACTOR AS DEFINED IN PARAGRAPHS 26 & 27 ABOVE MUST EACH COMPLETE A SEPARATE AFFIDAVIT TO BE SUBMITTED WITH THE BID. ALL OTHER SUBCONTRACTORS MUST EACH COMPLETE THIS FORM PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK. USE AS MANY COPIES OF THIS AFFIDAVIT FORM AS NECESSARY. Must be submitted with the bid or bid will be deemed noncompliant. Failure to submit required Exhibit O(s) is a material defect causing the bid to be rejected. STATE OF NEW JERSEY: SS: COUNTY OF CAMDEN: The undersigned, of full age, being duly sworn according to law, upon his oath, deposes and says:

1. I have read the specifications for this bid, including Instructions To Bidders, Paragraph 27 –

Significant Public Works Projects, and I am aware that Camden County has adopted a resolution

establishing workforce standards for significant public works projects. I am aware that these

workforce standards make the following a material requirement of this bid:

All workers employed on this significant public works project, whether employees of the contractor or

any subcontractor, shall have the benefit of the availability of an apprentice training program in the

appropriate trade(s), registered in the State of New Jersey, with the United States Department of

Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

2. You MUST choose one of the following:

a. __________My company has an apprentice training program in the appropriate trade(s),

registered in the State of New Jersey, with the United States Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training. The registration number for this apprentice training program is NJ (or

other State) # ______________________________ ; or

b. __________My company will not employ any worker of less than journeyman status on this

project.


Note: Camden County will monitor the worksite to ensure compliance with this material

provision and may, in its sole discretion, terminate the contract of any company found to be

in violation.

Sworn to and Subscribed

before me this day of , 20____.

___________________________ _______________________________________ NOTARY PUBLIC MY SIGNATURE ________________________________________ MY NAME (PRINT OR TYPE) ________________________________________ COMPANY NAME


EXHIBIT P

AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT Mandatory Language

Equal Opportunity for Individuals with Disabilities. The Contractor and the County do hereby agree that the provisions of Title II of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 (the “Act”) (42 U.S.C. s12101 et seq.), which prohibits discrimination on the basis of disability by public entities in all services, programs, and activities provided or made available by public entities, and the rules and regulations promulgated pursuant thereunto, are made a part of this contract. In providing any aid, benefit, or service on behalf of the County pursuant to this contract, the Contractor agrees that the performance shall be in strict compliance with the Act. In the event that the Contractor, its agents, servants, employees, or subcontractors violate or are alleged to have violated the Act during the performance of this contract, the Contractor shall defend the County in any action or administrative proceeding commenced pursuant to this Act. The Contractor shall indemnify, protect, and save harmless the County, its agents, servants, and employees from and against any and all suits, claims, losses, demands, or damages of whatever kind or nature arising out of or claimed to arise out of the alleged violation. The Contractor shall, at its own expense, appear, defend, and pay any and all charges for legal services and any and all costs and other expenses arising from such action or administrative proceeding or incurred in connection therewith. In any and all complaints brought pursuant to the County’s grievance procedure, the Contractor agrees to abide by any decision of the County, which is rendered pursuant to, said grievance procedure. If any action or administrative proceeding results in an award of damages against the County or if the County incurs any expense to cure a violation of the ADA which has been brought pursuant to its grievance procedure, the Contractor shall satisfy and discharge the same at its own expense.

The County shall, as soon as practicable after a claim has been made against it, give written notice thereof to the Contractor along with full and complete particulars of the claim. If any action or administrative proceeding is brought against the County or any of its agents, servants, and employees, the County shall expeditiously forward or have forwarded to the Contractor every demand, complaint, notice, summons, pleading, or other process received by the County or its representatives.

It is expressly agreed and understood that any approval by the County of the services

provided by the Contractor pursuant to this contract will not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to comply with the Act and to defend, indemnify, protect, and save harmless the Owner pursuant to this paragraph.

It is further agreed and understood that the Owner assumes no obligation to indemnify or

save harmless the Contractor, its agents, servants, employees and subcontractors for any claim which may arise out of their performance of this agreement. Furthermore, the Contractor expressly understands and agrees that the provisions of this indemnification clause shall in no way limit the Contractor’s obligations assumed in this agreement, nor shall they be construed to relieve the Contractor from any liability, nor preclude the Owner from taking any other actions available to it under any other provisions of this agreement or otherwise at law.


EXHIBIT Q

COUNTY OF CAMDEN ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF RECEIPT OF ADDENDA

BIDDER REQUIRED TO COMPLETE AND RETURN FORM WITH BID REGARDLESS OF WHETHER ADDENDA WAS ISSUED.

FAILURE TO COMPLETE AND RETURN FORM IS A FATAL DEFECT WHICH CANNOT BE CURED AND BID WILL BE REJECTED.

A. Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda:

Addendum Number Dated Initial

______________________________ ____________ ______

______________________________ ____________ ______

______________________________ ____________ ______

______________________________ ____________ ______

______________________________ ____________ ______

OR: B. Bidder acknowledges to the best of his/her knowledge no addendum has been issued by the County: ______ Dated __________________ Initial ________ Bidder is required to complete, sign and submit form with bid regardless of whether addenda were issued. Failure to complete and return form is a fatal defect which cannot be cured and bid will be rejected. See: N.J.S.A. 40A:11-23.2 By: _________________________________________________________________________ (Print or Type Name of Authorized Individual) Signature: ________________________________________________________________ Title: ______________________________________________________________________


EXHIBIT R

COUNTY OF CAMDEN UNIFORMED LAW ENFORCEMENT OFFICERS REQUIRMENT

Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 40A:11-23.1(c), the County has determined the following: ( ) Uniformed law enforcement officers are not required for the project. ( ) Uniformed law enforcement officers are required for the project. Reasonable estimate of costs for the following: traffic control personnel $ ________________

vehicles $ ________________

equipment $ ________________

administrative $ ________________

other (specify)

________________________________ $ ________________

________________________________ $ ________________

________________________________ $ ________________

________________________________ $ ________________

Total costs $ ________________ The above costs associated with additional traffic control required by the County have

been reasonably estimated in cooperation and consultation with the following municipalities affected by the project.

Name of Municipality Contact person ______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________


EXHIBIT S DISCLOSURE OF INVESTMENT ACTIVITIES IN IRAN

PART 1: CERTIFICATION BIDDERS MUST COMPLETE PART 1 BY CHECKING EITHER BOX. FAILURE TO CHECK ONE OF THE

BOXES WILL RENDER THE PROPOSAL NON-RESPONSIVE.

Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 52:32-55, any person or entity that submits a bid or proposal or otherwise proposes to enter into or renew a contract must complete the certification below to attest, under penalty of perjury, that neither the person or entity, nor any of its parents, subsidiaries, or affiliates, is identified on the Department of Treasury's Chapter 25 list (N.J.S.A. 51:32-57) as a person or entity engaging in investment activities in Iran. The Chapter 25 list is found on the Division's website at: http://www.state.nj.us.treasury/purchase/pdf/Chapter25List.pdf

Bidders must review this list prior to completing the below certification. Failure to complete the certification and return it with the bid will render a bidder's proposal non-responsive and the bid will be rejected. If the Director finds a person or entity to be in violation of law, s/he shall take action as may be appropriate and provided by law, rule or contract, including but not limited to, imposing sanctions, seeking compliance, recovering damages, declaring the party in default and seeking debarment or suspension of the party.

PLEASE CHECK THE APPROPRIATE BOX:

I certify, pursuant to N.J.S.A. 52:32-55, that neither the bidder listed above nor any of the bidder's parents, subsidiaries, or affiliates is listed on the N.J. Department of the Treasury's list of entities determined to be engaged in prohibited activities in Iran pursuant to the statute and the Chapter 25 List. I further certify that I am the person listed above, or I am an officer or representative of the entity listed above and am authorized to make this certification on its behalf. I will skip Part 2 and sign and complete the Certification below.

OR

I am unable to certify as above because the bidder and/or one or more of its parents, subsidiaries, or affiliates is listed on the Department's Chapter 25 List. I will provide a detailed, accurate and precise description of the activities in Part 2 below and sign and complete the Certification below. Failure to provide such will result in the proposal being rendered as non-responsive and appropriate penalties, fines and/or sanctions will be assessed as provided by law.

PART 2: PLEASE PROVIDE FURTHER INFORMATION RELATED TO INVESTMENT ACTIVITIES IN IRAN - add additional sheets if necessary.

You must provide a detailed, accurate and precise description of the activities of the bidding person/entity, or one of its parents, subsidiaries or affiliates, engaging in the investment activities in Iran outlined above by completing below:

Name of Entity: ______________________________; Relationship to Bidder: ____________________________

Description of Activities:_________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Duration of Engagement: ________________________Anticipated Cessation Date: ____________________

Bidder/Offeror Contact Name: _________________________; Contact Phone: ____________________________

Sign Certification - next page


EXHIBIT S - continued

DISCLOSURE OF INVESTMENT ACTIVITIES IN IRAN

BIDDER: _________________________________ Certification: I, being duly sworn upon my oath, hereby represent that the foregoing information and any attachments thereto to the best of my knowledge are true and complete. I acknowledge that I am authorized to execute this certification on behalf of the bidder, that the County of Camden is relying on the information contained herein and that I am under a continuing obligation from the date of this certification through the completion of any contracts with the County to notify the County in writing of any changes to the information contained herein; that I am aware that it is a criminal offense to make a false statement or misrepresentation in this certification, and if I do so, I am subject to criminal prosecution under the law and that it will constitute a material breach of my agreement(s) with the County of Camden, permitting the County to declare any contract(s) resulting from this certification void and unenforceable. Full Name (Print): ____________________________________ Signature: __________________________________________ Title: ______________________________________________ Date: ______________________


EXHIBIT T

NEW JERSEY ANTI-DISCRIMINATION PROVISIONS N.J.S.A. 10:2-1 et seq.

Pursuant to N.J.S.A. 10:2-1, if awarded a contract, the contractor agrees that:

a. In the hiring of persons for the performance of work under this contract or any subcontract hereunder, or for the procurement, manufacture, assembling or furnishing of any such materials, equipment, supplies or services to be acquired under this contract, no contractor, nor any person acting on behalf of such contractor or subcontractor, shall, by reason of race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, gender identity or expression, affectional or sexual orientation or sex, discriminate against any person who is qualified and available to perform the work to which the employment relates;

b. No contractor, subcontractor, nor any person on his behalf shall, in any manner, discriminate against or intimidate any employee engaged in the performance of work under this contract or any subcontract hereunder, or engaged in the procurement, manufacture, assembling or furnishing of any such materials, equipment, supplies or services to be acquired under such contract, on account of race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, gender identity or expression, affectional or sexual orientation or sex;

c. There may be deducted from the amount payable to the contractor by the contracting public agency, under this contract, a penalty of $50.00 for each person for each calendar day during which such person is discriminated against or intimidated in violation of the provisions of the contract; and

d. This contract may be canceled or terminated by the contracting public agency, and all money due or to become due hereunder may be forfeited, for any violation of this section of the contract occurring after notice to the contractor from the contracting public agency of any prior violation of this section of the contract.

No provision in this section shall be construed to prevent a board of education from designating that a contract, subcontract or other means of procurement of goods, services, equipment or construction shall be awarded to a small business enterprise, minority business enterprise or a women's business enterprise pursuant to P.L.1985, c.490 (C.18A:18A-51 et seq.).

INTERIOR RENOVATIONS @ SA PROJECT NO: 19.099 M. ALLAN VOGELSON LIBRARY CAMDEN COUNTY LIBRARY SYSTEM JUNE 2020 LIST OF DRAWINGS CONTRACT NO. 1: INTERIOR RENOVATIONS @ M. ALLAN VOGELSON LIBRARY, CAMDEN COUNTY LIBRAY SYSTEM T-OO1 COVER SHEET ARCHITECTURAL G-001 BARRIER FREE DETAILS D-111 DEMOLITION FIRST FLOOR PLAN A-111 FIRST FLOOR PLAN A-112 SECOND FLOOR PLAN A-113 THIRD FLOOR PLAN A-401 DOOR SCHEDULE & DETAILS A-411 WINDOW PLANS; SECTION A-431 ENLARGED CHILDREN'S AREA; CASEWORK MECHANICAL M-001 MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES AND SYMBOL LIST MD-101 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN M-101 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN PLUMBING P-001 PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES AND SYMBOL LIST P-101 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN ELECTRICAL E-001 ELECTRICAL GENERAL NOTES AND SYMBOL LIST ED-101 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN E-101 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN


SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-1

SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Project Description: The Base Contract shall include all work as described in the Interior Renvation @ M. Allan Vogelson Regional Branch Library; Camden County Library System.

B. This Section Includes the following:

1. Legal removal of existing materials indicated to be removed. 2. Installation of new materials as specified.

1.3 INTENT OF THE SPECIFICATIONS

A. The intent of these specifications is to describe the materials and methods of construction required for the performance of the work. In general, it is intended that the Contract Documents shall delineate the detailed extent of the work.

B. Before preparing and submitting a bid, it is mandatory that each bidder visit the site to determine

the extent of the work. Each bidder shall fully inform itself prior to bidding as to existing conditions and limitations under which this work will be performed and shall include in its bid a sum to cover the cost of all items necessary to perform the work as set forth in the Contract Documents.

1. Protect all existing construction. Damage to existing construction or equipment shall be

restored to the satisfaction of the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. Contractor shall be advised that the Contract for this work shall be awarded by the

Camden County Improvement Authority after receipt of bids. If said bids are within budgeted amounts, the contract work shall commence on or about June 19, 2020 and all work shall be completed no later than October 31, 2020.

3. The following work schedule shall be strictly adhered to. Failure to do so shall be cause to immediately terminate the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. It shall be understood by all parties if work is to be performed on weekends and holidays, the Contractor can perform said work only if approved by the Owner before hand.

1) Working hours on Monday through Friday shall be 6:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. or as

approved by Owner. Note: Contractor shall verify local ordinances and adjust the above hours accordingly as to exact start and stoppage times allowed.

4. Contractor shall upon completion of the day's work inspect and clean any debris and dust from spaces located in the area of work. Contractor shall provide all necessary precaution to protect existing building and contents during the removal and installation



process. The Contractor shall be responsible to remove and replace any item or finishes damaged during the execution of the Work.

5. The contractor shall report any discrepancies between the documents and field conditions to the architect ten (10) days prior to submission of a proposal so that the architect may clarify the discrepancy. Failure to report any discrepancies will nullify any extra cost, once a contract has been awarded.

C. AWARD OF CONTRACT

1. It is the intention of Camden County to award this contract as soon as possible after receipt of the proposals.

2. Contractor’s use of the site shall not affect the safety of the building occupants and visitors. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to properly protect the site, and its materials and equipment. Further, no exit ways from the existing building shall be closed to impede the safe exiting of staff and the public from the building.

D. CONTRACTS

1. The specifications contain forms of proposal for a single overall contract including all the work necessary to provide Camden County with a Certificate of Occupancy for all work delineated in Section 1.2 of The Summary of Work.

E. KNOWLEDGE OF CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

1. The contractor and his subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and materialmen shall consult in detail the general conditions, supplementary conditions, all division and sections of the specification, all drawings and all addenda for instructions and requirements pertaining to the work and shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish, install and complete the work in strict conformance with all provisions thereof.

2. The contractor will be held to have examined the site of the work prior to submitting its proposal and informed it, its subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and materialmen of all existing conditions affecting the execution of the work.

3. The contractor will be held to have examined the contract documents, and modifications thereto, as they may affect subdivisions of the work and informed it, its subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and materialmen of all conditions thereof affecting the execution of the work.

4. The scope of work for the contract is not necessarily limited to the description of each section of the specifications. Include all minor items not expressly indicated in the contract documents, or as might be found necessary as a result of field conditions, in order to complete the work as it is intended, without any gaps between the various subdivisions of work of the contractors and their subcontractors.

5. The contractor will be held to be thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting labor in the neighborhood of the project including, but not limited to, Unions, incentive pay, procurement, living and commuting conditions and to have informed its subcontractor and sub-subcontractors thereof.

F. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS INFORMATION

1. The contract documents are prepared in accordance with available information as to existing conditions and locations. If, during construction, conditions are revealed at variance with the contract documents, notify the Architect immediately so that supplementary instructions may be issued.



2. The specifications determine the kinds and methods of installation of the various materials, the drawings establish the quantities, dimensions and details of materials, the schedules on the drawings give the location, type and extent of the material.

3. Should the drawings, specifications or schedules disagree in themselves or with either or both of the others, the better quality or greater quantity of work or materials shall be performed and provided, unless otherwise directed in writing by the Architect.

4. Dimensions given on the drawings govern scale measurements and large-scale drawings govern small-scale drawings, except as to anything omitted unless such omission is expressly noted on the larger scale drawings.

5. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular number in the contract documents, it shall be the same as referring to it in the plural. As many such materials, articles or pieces of equipment shall be provided as are required to complete the work.

G. Contractor Use of Premises: Limit use of the premises to construction activities in areas

indicated; allow for Owner occupancy and use by the public.

1. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated. Portions of the site beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed.

2. Keep driveways and entrances clear at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize requirements for storage of materials.

H. Use of the Existing Building: Maintain the existing building in a weather tight condition throughout

construction. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Take precautions necessary to protect the building and occupants during the construction period.

I. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during construction.

Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Owner's operations.

J. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and place and install

equipment in completed areas prior to Substantial Completion provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. A Certificate of Substantial Completion will be executed for each portion of the Work

occupied prior to Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials prior to Owner occupancy.

K. It shall be understood that the working hours for this project shall be between the hours indicated

above. All classrooms and interior spaces affected by the work shall be swept clean daily and restored to its original condition at the end of each working day.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)

END OF SECTION 01010




CONTRACTOR’S USE OF PREMISES 01015- 1

SECTION 01015- CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Includes the Following:

1. This Section applies to situations in which the Contractor or his representatives including, but not necessarily limited to, suppliers, subcontractors and employees enter upon Owner’s property.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Promptly upon award of the Contract, notify all pertinent personnel regarding requirements of this Section.

B. Owner may require all personnel who will enter upon the Owner's property certify their awareness

of and familiarity with requirements of this Section. 1.4 TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES

A. Provide adequate protection for curbs and sidewalks over which trucks and equipment pass to reach job site. If any damage occurs the contractor is responsible for repairs.

B. Contractor's vehicles:

1. Require Contractor's vehicles, vehicles belonging to employees of Contractor, and all other vehicles entering upon Owner's property in performance of Work of Contract, to use only the Access Route approved in advance by Owner.

2. Do not permit such vehicles to park on any street or other area of Owner's property except in the area approved by Owner as "Contractor's Parking Area."

1.5 FACILITY USAGE

A. Provide adequate protection for all interior and exterior portions of the building during set-up and construction. If any damage occurs the contractor is responsible for repairs as designated by the Owner.

B. Restrooms and other amenities of the building will only be used with permission of the Owner. If

such authorization is given, the Contractor is responsible for maintaining cleanliness and repairs as designated by the Owner.


CONTRACTOR’S USE OF PREMISES 01015- 2

1.6 SECURITY

A. Restrict access of all persons entering upon the Owner's property to the Access Route and to the actual site of the work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)



ALLOWANCES 01020-1

SECTION 01020 – ALLOWANCES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Selected materials and equipment, and in some cases, installation is included in Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances are established to defer selection until more information is available. Other requirements will be issued by a Change Order.

B. Types of allowances required include the following:

1. Lump sum allowances. 2. Contingency allowance.

C. Procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders are included in Division 1 Section "Modification Procedures."

D. Selection and Purchase: At the earliest feasible date after Contract award, advise the Architect of the date when selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delay.

1. When requested by the Architect, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections; include recommendations that are relevant to performance of the Work.

2. Purchase products and systems from the designated supplier.

E. Submittals: Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form of Change Orders.

1. Submit invoices or delivery slips to indicate quantities of materials delivered for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

F. Contingency and Lump Sum Allowance: Do not include overhead and profit, bonding, insurance and general conditions’ costs. These costs shall be included as part of the Contract Sum Base Bid and not part of the Allowance.

1. Allowances shall include costs of specific products and materials ordered under the Allowance, including delivery. Allowances shall include installation costs unless indicated to be included as part of the Contract Sum Base Bid and not part of the Allowance.

2. Use Allowances only as directed by the Architect and only by Change Order, which designates amount(s) to be charged to the Allowance.


ALLOWANCES 01020-2

3. At Project Closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the Allowances to the Owner by Change Order.

G. Unused Materials: Return unused materials for credit to the Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.

1. If it is not feasible to return unused material, prepare unused material for the Owner's storage, and deliver to the storage space as directed. Otherwise, disposal is the Contractor's responsibility.

H. Inspection: Inspect products covered by an allowance promptly upon delivery for damage or defects.

I. Preparation: Coordinate materials and installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is integrated with related construction activities.

J. SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCE

1. Contract No. 1 - Allowance No. 1: The Contractor shall allow the contingency sum of Twenty-Five Thousand Dollars ($25,000.00) to cover unforeseen contingency items, or additional Owner requested work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



CONTRACTOR’S SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES 01021-1

SECTION 01021 - CONTRACTOR’S SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The Contractor is responsible for the completion of this particular project as shown and specified and is in charge of his project until completion and acceptance and is responsible for the coordination of all work and all trades in his project and for coordination with each other. Contractor shall study the specifications and notify the Architect of any inconsistencies and of any work not done in conformance with the Contract Documents.

B. Any existing conditions that shows evidence of deterioration or failure, and has not been indicated or specified herein shall be reported immediately to the Architect for his clarification and final determination.

C. Obtain from the Owner, current State Tax I.D. number to eliminate payment (or obtain rebate) of New Jersey Sales Taxes as applicable to a non-profit organization.

D. The conditions defined in this section supplement, and where applicable, supersede portions of the General Conditions for application to the specific nature of this project. It in no way relieves the Contractor of his responsibilities as defined and intended in the General Conditions.

1.3 LINES, LEVELS, AND GRADES

A. Lay out all work and establish all points, lines and levels and assume all responsibility for same.

1.4 STAGING AREAS

A. Designation of staging areas will be coordinated with the Owner’s Representative. 1.5 GUARANTEES

A. Except as otherwise specified, guarantee all work against defects resulting from use of inferior materials, equipment or workmanship for one year from date of final acceptance of building.

1.6 FURNITURE

A. Furniture stored by Owner shall be relocated by Owner. 1.8 BUILDING SECURITY

A. Contractor shall be responsible during this period for the security of the portions of the building being renovated and entrances being used by construction crews.


CONTRACTOR’S SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES 01021-2




APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01027-1

SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section.

1. Schedules: The Contractor's start-up and completion dates are specified in Division 1 Section "Summary of Work."

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including:

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule. b. Application for Payment Forms, including Continuation Sheets. c. List of subcontractors. d. Schedule of allowances. e. Schedule of alternates. f. List of products. g. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. h. Schedule of submittals.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Applications for Payment.

3. Sub-schedules: Where Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish the format for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each unit of material and class of labor required for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:



a. Project name and location. b. Name and address of owner. c. Contract number. d. Name and address of the Architect. e. Architect's project number. f. Contractor's name and address. g. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of work by material, quantity and labor classification. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value.

i. Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum.

5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include requirements for insurance and bonded warehousing, if required.

6. Provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Unit-Cost Allowances: Show the line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by the measured quantity. Estimate quantities from the best indication in the Contract Documents.

8. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs and margins on actual costs only when such items are listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include the total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values.



9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

10. Include separate line items for Project Closeout & Punchlist in the amount of 3% of the total contract.

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner.

1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment-Application Times: The date for each progress payment is the 30th day of each month. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and ends 30 days prior to the date for each progress payment.

C. Payment-Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the form for Applications for Payment.

D. Payment-Application Forms: Use forms provided by the Owner for Applications for Payment.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include notarization and execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the previous pay period.

F. Transmittal: Submit 5 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate

information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

G. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanics liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must

submit waivers.



4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with the Contractor's waiver of mechanics lien for the period of construction covered by the application.

a. Submit final Applications for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Use AIA Document G706A as the form for Release of Liens.

H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 3. Schedule of Values. 4. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 5. Schedule of principal products. 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the

Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction meeting. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire the Owner's insurance.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment.

1. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

2. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include:

a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. c. Test/adjust/balance records. d. Maintenance instructions. e. Meter readings. f. Startup performance reports. g. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. h. Final cleaning. i. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety. j. Advice on shifting insurance coverages. k. Final progress photographs. l. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of

Substantial Completion.



J. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following:

1. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled. 4. Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue delay. 5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner. 6. Certified property survey. 7. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 8. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 9. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements. 10. Completion of training necessary for the Owners personnel to operate all systems

trouble-free. 11. Execution of maintenance agreements and assurance that maintenance is on-going.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035-1

SECTION 01035 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

A. General: This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

B. Minor Changes in the Work: Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to Contract Sum or Time, will be issued by the Architect on AIA form G710.

C. Change Order Proposal Requests: Proposal requests that require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Time if accepted, will be issued by the Architect, with a detailed description of the proposed change and supplemental or revised Drawings and Specification. Proposal requests are for information only and shall not be considered as instruction to stop work in progress, or to execute the change.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, within twenty calendar days of receipt, submit an estimate of cost to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with the amount of purchases to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract time.

D. Contractor Initiated Change Order Proposal Requests: When unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request to the Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change. Provide a complete description of the change. Indicate effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with amount of purchases to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Comply with requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

E. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G 709.

F. Allowance Adjustment: Base each change order proposal request for an allowance cost adjustment on the difference between the actual purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by the final measurement of work-in-place, with reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections and similar margins.

1. Include installation costs in the purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance.


MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01035-2

2. When requested, prepare explanations and documentation to substantiate margins claimed.

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work claimed in the change orders related to unit-cost allowances.

4. The Owner reserves the right to establish the actual quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure or count.

G. Submit claims for increased costs because of change in scope or nature of the allowance described in contract documents, whether for purchase amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead and profit, within twenty calendar days of receipt of change order or construction change directive authorizing work to proceed. Claims submitted later than twenty calendar days will be rejected.

1. Change order cost amount shall not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense except when clearly demonstrated that the nature or scope of work required was changed from what could have been foreseen from the allowance description and other information in contract documents.

2. No change to the Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher or lower priced materials or systems, of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.

H. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and Contractor are not in agreement on terms of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Architect may issue Construction Change Directive on AIA Form G714, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the change and designate method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Time.

I. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of the change submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

J. Change Order Procedures: Upon the Owner's approval of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of the Owner and Contractor on AIA Form G701, as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.




PROJECT COORDINATION - SINGLE PRIME CONTRACTS 01040-1

SECTION 01040 – PROJECT COORDINATION – SINGLE PRIME CONTRACTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction operations on the Project to be fulfilled by the General Contractor including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Conservation. 3. Coordination drawings. 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel.Cleaning and protection.

B. The Contractor shall participate in all coordination requirements.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" for progress meetings, coordination meetings, and

preinstallation conferences. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction

Schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment" for coordinating general installation. 4. Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" for coordinating contract closeout.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: The Contractor shall coordinate its construction activities with his own sub contractors and other entities involved to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.

1. The Contractor shall schedule its construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Where availability of space is limited, the Contractor shall coordinate installation of different components with sub contractors to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. The Contractor shall make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their Work is required.



C. Administrative Procedures: The Contractor shall coordinate scheduling and timing of its required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of sub contractors to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project closeout activities.

D. Conservation: The Contractor shall coordinate construction activities to assure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the Work.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for its own cutting and patching, ceiling and wall removal and replacement, etc. to allow for the installation of its own work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: The Contractor shall prepare and submit coordination drawings based on appropriate information from each Sub Contractor, where close and careful coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off site by separate entities, and where limited space for efficient installation of different components.

1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences.

B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations, the Contractor shall submit a list of its principal staff assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the Project Site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers.

1. Post copies of the list in an approved location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS

A. Inspection of Conditions: The Contractor shall inspect the conditions under which work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that they are more stringent than requirements in Contract Documents.



C. Inspect material immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items.

D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing each construction element.

E. Coordinate temporary enclosures with inspections and tests, to minimize uncovering completed construction for that purpose.

F. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install components at standard heights for the application indicated. Refer questionable decisions to the Architect.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place during handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

B. Limiting Exposures: The contractor shall supervise its construction operations and those of its sub-contractors to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.



CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-1

SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Where approval of procedures for cutting and patching is required, submit a proposal describing these procedures before proceeding. Include the following information, as applicable, in the proposal:

1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required and how it will be performed. 2. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work. 3. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit

details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure.

4. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the Architect's right to later require complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the structural elements.

B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems.

C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.



1. Engage an experienced firm or entity to cut and patch the exposed Work. 1.5 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any existing warranties.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building until provisions have been made to bypass them.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original Installer; comply with the original Installer's recommendations.



1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by-pass utility services, such as pipe or conduit, before cutting. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and cutting.

C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.

1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.

2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.



REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-1

SECTION 01095 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Definitions: Basic Contract definitions are included in the General Conditions.

1. “Indicated” refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on Drawings; Paragraphs or Schedules in Specifications; and similar requirements in Contract Documents. Where terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used, it is to help locate the reference.

2. “Directed,” Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean "directed by the Architect," "requested by the Architect," and similar phrases.

3. “Approve,” used in conjunction with action on submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities stated in General and Supplementary Conditions.

4. “Regulation” includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

5. “Furnish” means "supply and deliver, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations."

6. “Install” describes operations at the site including "unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations."

7. “Provide” means "furnish and install, complete and ready for use." 8. “Installer”: "Installer" is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor as

employee, subcontractor, or sub-subcontractor for performance of a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.

a. The term "experienced" when used with "Installer" means having a minimum of 5 previous Projects similar in size to this Project and being familiar with the precautions required and with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.

9. “Project Site” is the space available for construction activities, either exclusively or with others performing other construction on the Project. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land upon which the Project is to be built.

10. “Testing Laboratories”: A "testing laboratory" is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.

B. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute's 16-Division format and MASTERFORMAT numbering system.


REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-2

C. Language used in the Specifications is the abbreviated type. Implied words and meanings will be appropriately interpreted. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable and where the context so indicates.

1. Imperative language is used generally. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the text subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted.

2. The words "shall be" shall be included by inference wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

D. Abbreviations and Names: Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries.

E. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents; correspondence and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards; and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work.




PROJECT MEETINGS 01200- 1

SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. The preconstruction conference will be scheduled within 5 working days after the Owner has issued the Notice to Proceed, but prior to actual start of the Work.

B. Attendance: Architect, representative of Owner and contractor.

C. Minimum agenda: Data will be distributed and discussed on the following:

1. Organizational arrangement of Contractor's forces and personnel, and those of subcontractors, materials suppliers, and the Project Manager.

2. Channels and procedures for communication. 3. Review set-up area. 4. Review all required permits. 5. Review insurance requirements. 6. Construction schedule, including sequence of critical work. 7. Contract Documents. 8. Processing of Shop Drawings and other data submitted to the Project Manager for

review. 9. Processing of field decisions and Change Orders. 10. Rules and regulations governing performance of the work. 11. Procedures for safety and first aid, security, quality control, housekeeping, and related

matters. 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Progress meetings will be scheduled by the Owner's representative weekly or as described at the pre-bid meeting.

B. Attendance: Architect, Owner’s representative, Contractor and Job Superintendent.

C. Review of work progress.

1. Review of work progress. 2. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 3. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 4. Maintenance of progress schedule. 5. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 6. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 7. Coordination of projected progress. 8. Maintenance of quality and work standards.


PROJECT MEETINGS 01200- 2

9. Effect of proposed changes on progress, schedule, and coordination. 10. Other business relating to work.

1.4 PRE-FINAL INSPECTION

A. The Contractor must inform the Architect and the building Owner's representative upon completion of the work. Pre-final inspection will then be scheduled.

B. Installations or details noted as deficient during inspection must be repaired and corrected by the contractor.

C. Once corrections have been made, the Contractor must inform the Architect and building Owner's representative so a final inspection can be scheduled.

1.5 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Scheduled by contractor upon completion of deficient items found during pre-final inspection.

B. Attendance: Architect, Owner’s representative and contractor.

C. Minimum Agenda:

1. Walk-through inspection. 2. Identification of needed corrections to be completed by the Contractor with final approval

from warrantor. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)



SUBMITTALS 01300-1

SECTION 01300 – SUBMITTALS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies requirements for handling submittals.

B. General Procedures: Coordinate submittal preparation with performance of construction activities, and with purchasing or fabrication, delivery, other submittals and related activities. Transmit in advance of performance of related activities to avoid delay.

1. Coordinate transmittal of different submittals for related elements so processing will not be

delayed by the need to review concurrently for coordination. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination until related submittals are received.

2. Processing: Allow two weeks for initial review. Allow more time if processing must be delayed for coordination with other submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor when a submittal must be delayed for coordination. Allow two weeks for reprocessing each submittal.

a. No extension of time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.

3. Submittal Preparation: Place a label or title block on each submittal for identification. Provide a 4" x 5" space on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken.

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer.

4. Submittal Transmittal: Package submittals appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit with the transmittal form attached to the end of this section. Submittals received from other than the Contractor will be returned without action.

a. Transmittal Form: On the form record requests for data, and deviations from Contract Documents. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Documents

C. (not used)

D. Submittal Schedule: Submit the Submittal Schedule within 10 days of the Construction Schedule. Coordinate the Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values and list of products as well as the Construction Schedule.


SUBMITTALS 01300-2

1. Prepare the Schedule in chronological order; include submittals required during

construction. Provide the following information: a. Scheduled date for the first submittal. b. Related Section number. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Description of the construction element covered. e. Scheduled date the Architect's final release or approval.

E. Distribution of Schedules: Distribute copies of the Construction and Submittal Schedules to the

Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the temporary field office. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.

1. Updating: Revise each Schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been

made. Issue the updated Schedules concurrently with report of each meeting.

F. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report, recording information concerning events at the site. Submit duplicate copies to the Architect and Owner’s representative at weekly intervals. Include the following information:

1. List of subcontractors at the site. 2. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 3. Accidents, stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 4. Emergency procedures. 5. Change Orders received, implemented. 6. Partial Completions, occupancies. 7. Substantial Completions authorized.

G. Shop Drawings: Submit new information, drawn to accurate scale. Indicate deviations from Contract

Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Include the following information:

1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included. 3. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 5. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full- size Drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2" x 11" but no larger than 30" x 42". 6. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable translucent print and two blue-line print to the

Architect for review; with copy of the transmittal to the Construction Manager, the reproducible print will be returned.

7. Final Submittal: Submit 3 blue-line prints; if the Drawing is required for maintenance manuals submit 5 prints. 2 prints will be retained; the remainder will be returned. One of the prints returned shall be maintained as a "Record Document".

8. Do not use Shop Drawings without a final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction.

9. The Contractor shall issue copies of returned submittals to its subcontractors.

H. Product Data: Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element or system. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where Product Data includes information on several


SUBMITTALS 01300-3

products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information:

1. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. 2. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. 3. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. 4. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 5. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. 6. Notation of coordination requirements. 7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single-copy where selection of options is

required. 8. Maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one, and will return the other marked with

action taken and corrections or modifications required. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the

submittal may serve as the final submittal. 9. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, and others required for

performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data is in the installer's possession.

a. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction.

I. Samples: Submit full-size Samples cured and finished as specified and identical to the product

proposed. Mount, display, or package Samples to facilitate review. Prepare Samples to match the Architect's Sample. Include the following:

1. Generic description. 2. Source. 3. Product name or name of manufacturer. 4. Compliance with recognized standards. 5. Availability and delivery time. 6. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of these

characteristics, and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the component as delivered and installed. Where variations are inherent in the product, submit multiple units that show limits of the variations. One approved sample must be submitted to the Owner’s representative by the Contractor.

a. Refer to other Sections for Samples that illustrate details of assembly, fabrication techniques, workmanship, connections, operation and similar characteristics.

b. Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned for incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals.

7. Preliminary submittals: Where Samples are for selection of characteristics from a range of choices, submit a full set of choices for the product. Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned indicating selection and other action.

8. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets; one will be returned marked with the action taken. Maintain Sample sets at the Project site, for quality comparisons.

a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal.

b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set.


SUBMITTALS 01300-4

J. Distribution: Prepare additional sets for subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, installers, and

others as required for performance. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

K. Architect's Action: Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.

1. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a self-explanatory action stamp.

The stamp will be appropriately marked to indicate action taken. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

(Submittal Cover Sheet attached on following page)


Settembrino Architects

25 Bridge Ave. Suite 201 Red Bank, NJ 07701

732.741.4900 (o) 732.741.4977 (f)

SUBMITTAL COVER SHEET

Contractor: ________________________

Address: __________________________

City, State, Zip: _____________________

Submittal Number: __________________

Submittal Date: _____________________

Submittal Name: ____________________

☐ First Submission

☐ Re-Submission No.: ____

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION:

Name of Project: ________________________

Board of Education: _____________________

SA Project No. : _________________________

Specification: ___________________________

Subcontractor: __________________________

Manufacturer: ___________________________

Supplier: _______________________________

Is this a substitution? ☐ Yes ☐ No

If yes, has a matrix comparison been included? ☐ Yes ☐ No

If no, provide reason: ________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

Comments:


MONTHLY SUBMISSION CHECKLIST 01350-1

SECTION 01350 – MONTHLY SUBMISSION CHECKLIST

MONTHLY SUBMISSION CHECKLIST Monthly Submission Checklist – Please note that this checklist does not constitute a transmittal. All items submitted in the package must be identified on a separate transmittal. If certain materials were submitted separately from the package, for example monthly project workforce reports and certified payrolls, then the date this material was submitted must be indicated on the checklist and the corresponding transmittals must be attached. Attached to this monthly checklist are the following items and as outlined elsewhere within the contract documents. 1. _____ Original Board of Trustees Voucher. 2. Payment Requisition.

3. Stored Materials: 3a. A letter from the contractor stating that payment for stored materials will result in an

improvement in the contractor’s progress on the construction schedule. 3b. A Bill of Sale naming the owner as having ownership of the material from the contractor,

not from the subcontractor. 3c. Invoices and other material as back up to the nature and quantity of materials stored. 3d. Certificate of Insurance covering the stored materials. 4. Lien waivers from subcontractors and material suppliers. 5. Update construction schedule (Bar chart or CPM). 6. Complete list of the sub-contractors to date. 7. Copy of daily reports. 8. _____ Update list of shop drawings to be submitted. 9. _____ Update list of shop drawings and current approval status. 10. Project photographs. 11. Prevailing wage manning reports (both prime & subcontractors). 12. Certified Payrolls. 13. Payment Application (AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703). 13a. The amounts identified in the payment application correspond with those approved on

pencil copies verified by the owner’s representative together with the architect in the field.


MONTHLY SUBMISSION CHECKLIST 01350-2

13b. No mathematical errors were evident, all columns were completed and the retainage

percentage was correct. 13c. Correct payment application forms were used (See Section 01027). 13d. The payment application was signed by the contractor and notarized. 13e. Other: (For example, outstanding General Submission Checklist items). CONTRACTOR PLEASE NOTE: 1. Payment Requisitions will not be processed unless all items of this checklist are submitted. 2. Shop drawings not submitted within the time requirements of the specifications will mandate five

(5%) percent of the payment requisition be retained the first month, seven (7%) percent the second month, nine (9%) percent the third month and so forth up to fifteen (15%) percent.

COMPANY NAME CONTRACTOR’S SIGNATURE DATE PROJECT NUMBER PROJECT DATE Payment requisitions will not be processed unless all items of this checklist are submitted. THE ABOVE NOTED PAYMENT APPLICATION SUBMITTAL PACKAGE CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING ITEMS AS INDICATED BY A CHECK MARK: Note: Those items not marked with a check may be annotated with further information.



TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 - 1

SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provision of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: Temporary services and facilities, utilities, construction and support facilities, security and protection. Provide facilities ready for use. Maintain, expand and modify as needed. Remove when no longer needed, or replaced by permanent facilities.

B. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner, except where noted.

C. Temporary Facilities: Comply with applicable laws and regulations.

1. Telephones: Provide temporary cellular telephone service for personnel engaged in construction. Provide a list of important telephone numbers.

2. Storage, Fabrication Trailers, and Contractor Office Trailer: Provide trailers equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, and to serve as an office for the Contractor.

3. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets and drinking water facilities. Use existing designated toilets. Clean on a daily basis.

4. Electric power. Use existing. Owner will pay use charge. 5. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste daily. Comply with NFPA 241 for

removal of combustible waste. Enforce requirements strictly. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose in a lawful manner.

6. Temporary Interior Partitions, Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of barricades. Paint appropriate warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where needed provide lighting, including flashing lights. Keep all building exits operational at all times.

a. For temporary interior partitions and enclosure walls provide ½” thick fire rated plywood one side, over ½” type “X” gypsum board securely fastened to both sides of 20 Ga. 4” metal studs at 16” o.c. – (1) hr fire rating. Run the plywood up to 8’-0” AFF. Run the gypsum boards up to the deck above. Doors and frames to be (1) hr rated hollow metal knock down type – “B” label. Provide R-11 fiberglass batt insulation at temporary partitions and enclosure walls located at exterior walls.

D. Environmental Protection: Operate temporary facilities and conduct construction by methods that

comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted. Avoid use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints.


TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 - 2

E. Operation: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability to intended use to minimize abuse. Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

F. Termination and Removal: Remove each facility when the need has ended, or replaced by a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or restore construction delayed because of interference with the facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.



MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600-1

SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock.

1. "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model designation indicated in the manufacturer's product literature.

B. "Materials" are products that are shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.

C. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.

D. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a single source.

1. When the Contractor has the option of selecting between two or more products, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected.

E. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach manufacturer's nameplates or trademarks on surfaces exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.

1. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an inconspicuous accessible surface. The nameplate shall contain the following information and essential operating data:

a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings.

F. Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling: Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss.

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage and prevent overcrowding construction spaces. Coordinate with installation to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses.



2. Deliver products in manufacturer's original sealed container or packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing.

3. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with Contract Documents, and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

4. Store products to facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store heavy materials away from the structure in a manner that will not endanger supporting construction.

5. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions.

G. Product Selection: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and unused at installation.

1. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

2. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.

3. Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or manufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.

a. Where products are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or equal" comply with provisions for "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

4. Non-Proprietary Specifications: When Specifications list products or manufacturers that are available and may be used, but do not restrict the Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose any product that complies with Contract requirements. Contractor must comply with Division 1 Section “Product Substitutions”, to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

H. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product, listing characteristics required, with or without use of a brand name, provide a product that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with requirements.

1. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply and are recommended for the application. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in product literature, or by certification of performance.

2. Compliance with Standards: Where Specifications require compliance with a standard, select a product that complies with the standard specified.

3. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching a Sample, the Architect's decision on whether a proposed product matches is final. Where no product matches and complies with other requirements, comply with Division 1 Section “Product Substitutions”, for selection of a matching product in another category.

4. Visual Selection: Where requirements include the phrase "...as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other requirements. The Architect will select color, pattern and texture from the product line selected.

I. Installation of Products: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. Clean exposed surfaces and protect to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.






PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631-1

SECTION 01631 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions:

1. Substitutions requested ten (10) days (Saturdays, Sundays or holidays excepted) prior to the bid date, and accepted by the Architect prior to award of Contract.

2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 4. Compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities.

B. Submittal: Except as otherwise noted in specific sections of these specification requests for substitution will be considered if received within forty-five (45) days after a notice to proceed has been issued to the bid. Requests received after more than forty-five (45) days after the issuance of a notice to proceed may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect.

1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution in the form and in accordance with procedures for Change Order proposals.

2. Identify the product, or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Document compliance with requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate:

a. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures.

b. Samples, where applicable or requested. c. A comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those

specified. d. A list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to

construction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution.

e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Construction Schedule compared to the Schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.

f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum.

g. Certification that the substitution is equal-to or better in every respect to that required by Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in application indicated. Include Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may be necessary because of the substitution's failure to perform adequately.

3. Architect's Action: Within one week of receipt of the request for substitution, the Architect will request additional information necessary for evaluation. Within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week receipt of additional information, whichever is later, the Architect


PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 01631-2

will notify the Contractor of acceptance of rejection. If a decision on use of a substitute cannot be made within the time allocated, use the product specified. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order.

C. Substitutions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Architect when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements.

1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents.

2. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted. 3. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract

Documents. 4. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract

Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

5. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.

6. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate contractors, and similar considerations.

7. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.

9. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provide the required warranty.

D. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval.




PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700-1

SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Substantial Completion: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following:

1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed substantially complete.

2. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents.

3. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, damage or settlement survey and similar record information.

4. Complete final clean up. Touch-up and repair and restore marred exposed finishes.

B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will proceed or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.

1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed.

2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance.

3. Should a third inspection be required as a result of the Contractor’s failure to complete work, then the costs associated with the reinspection will be borne by the Contractor and not the Owner.

C. Final Acceptance: Before requesting inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following:

1. Submit final payment request with releases. 2. Submit a final statement, accounting for changes to the Contract Sum. 3. Submit a copy of the final inspection list stating that each item has been completed or

otherwise resolved for acceptance. 4. Submit AIA G707 Consent of Surety to final payment. 5. Submit evidence of continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements. 6. Submit AIA G706A Release of Liens form. 7. Submit AIA G706 Payment of Debits and Claims form.

D. Re-inspection Procedure: The Architect will re-inspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect.


PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700-2

1. Upon completion of re-inspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advise the Contractor of work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.

2. If necessary, re-inspection will be repeated. However, the costs associated with the reinspection as a result of the Contractor’s failure to complete work will be borne by the Contractor and not the Owner.

E. Record Document Submittals: Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes; protect from loss in a secure location; provide access to Record Documents for the Architect's reference.

F. (not used)

G. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of the Project Manual, including addenda. Mark to show variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the Specifications and modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options and similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and Product Data.

1. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's records.

H. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities.

I. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.




PROJECT CLOSEOUT SUBMISSION CHECKLIST 01701-1

SECTION 01701 – PROJECT CLOSEOUT SUBMISSION CHECKLIST

PROJECT CLOSEOUT SUBMISSION CHECKLIST Please note that this checklist does not constitute a transmittal. All items submitted in the package must be identified on a separate transmittal. If certain materials were submitted separately from this package, corresponding transmittal(s) must be attached and appropriate column checked, as to whether item(s) was submitted to Owner, Architect or Owner’s representative. Refer to Page #3. Attached to this checklist are the following items, along with any additional items as may be required elsewhere within the contract documents for final closeout. 1. Project Closeout: To the requirements of Division 1 Section 01700 “Project Closeout”.

1a. Final Payment Application (AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703); with final Certified Payrolls and Prevailing Wage Manning Reports.

1b. _____ Board of Trustees Voucher for Final Payment. 1c. _____ AIA 707 Consent of Surety to final payment. 1d. _____ AIA G706A Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens – with Subcontractors’ releases of liens attached. 1e. _____ AIA G706 Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims. 1f. _____ Final Statement of Accounting for changes to the Contract Sum. Statement shall reflect all adjustments.

a. Original Contract Sum b. Additions and deductions resulting from:

• Previous Change Orders. • Cash allowances. • Unit Prices. • Other adjustments. • Deductions for liquidated damages. • Deductions for re-inspection payments for additional A/E inspections

and services. • Deductions for reimbursements of contractor’s work performed by

Owner or other prime contractors.

c. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted. d. Previous payments. e. Sum remaining due.

1g. _____ Final adjustment Change Order based upon the Final Statement of Accounting from item “1f.” above.



1h. _____ A copy of the final inspection list stating that each punch list item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

2. Warranties and Bonds: To the requirements of Division 1 Section 01740 “Warranties and Bonds”. 2a. _____ Standard Product Warranties. 2b. _____ Special Warranties. 2c. _____ Maintenance Bond (1 year). NOTE: During the eleventh month after the date of final acceptance of the work, the Owner,

Architect, Owner’s representative and the Contractor shall review the work to confirm the requirements of the Contract have been satisfied. Any corrective work associated with the warranty will be addressed at that time, prior to the expiration of the warranty. This requirement will not modify any of the specific Contractor’s obligations relative to their Contract Agreement, specifically those relating to warranties that are in effect for a period greater than one (1) year.

3. Project Record Documents: To the requirements of Division 1 Section 01720 “Project Record Documents”. 3a. (not used)

3b. _____ Record Specifications.

3c. _____ Record Shop Drawings. 3d. _____ Record Product Data Submittals. 3e. _____ Record Sample Submittals. 3f. _____ Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 3g. _____ Miscellaneous Record Submittals. 4. _____ Certificates of Inspections: To the requirements of the General Conditions and individual technical sections of the Specifications.

• As required by Building Code. CONTRACTOR PLEASE NOTE: Final Payment Requisition will not be processed unless all applicable items of this checklist are submitted. COMPANY NAME CONTRACTOR’S SIGNATURE DATE



PROJECT NAME AND NUMBER THIS PROJECT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTAL PACKAGE CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING ITEMS AS INDICATED IN THE ABOVE LISTING BY A CHECK MARK. LIST ITEMS BELOW. Note: Provide appropriate copies of transmittal if item(s) was submitted separately from this package, and provide check mark as to whether it was sent to the Owner, Architect or Owner’s representative. Previously submitted to Owner Arch Owner Rep ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __ ____________________________________________________ DATE: ___________ __ __ __

(ADD ADDITIONAL PAGE(S) AS REQUIRED)





FINAL CLEANING 01710 - 1

SECTION 01710 - FINAL CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for final cleaning at Substantial

Completion.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities" specifies general cleanup and waste-removal requirements.

2. Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" specifies general contract closeout requirements. S 3. Special cleaning requirements for specific construction elements are included in

appropriate Sections.

C. Single Prime Contract: The Contractor is responsible for final cleaning his own Work. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating final cleaning of an area or piece of equipment where more than one subcontractor is involved.

D. Environmental Requirements: Conduct cleaning and waste-disposal operations in compliance with local laws and ordinances. Comply fully with federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

1. Do not dispose of volatile wastes, such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner, in storm or sanitary drains.

2. Burning or burying of debris, rubbish, or other waste material on the premises is not permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by the manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final-cleaning operations when indicated. Employ experienced workers or

professional cleaners for final cleaning.


FINAL CLEANING 01710 - 2

B. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for the entire Project or a portion of the Project.

1. Clean exposed exterior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

2. Leave the Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed during construction to protect previously completed installations during the remainder of the construction period.

D. Compliances: Comply with governing regulations and safety standards for cleaning operations. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 - 1

SECTION 01720 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents.

B. Project Record Documents required include the following:

1. Marked-up copies of Shop Drawings. 2. Newly prepared drawings. 3. Marked-up copies of Specifications, addenda, and Change Orders. 4. Marked-up Product Data submittals. 5. Record Samples. 6. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. 7. Record information on Work that is recorded only schematically.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies general requirements for preparing and submitting Project Record Documents.

2. Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" specifies general closeout requirements.

D. The contractor is responsible for obtaining, maintaining, and recording Project Record Document information for its own Work. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating information, where information from more than one sub-contractor is to be integrated with information from other sub-contractors, to form one combined record.

E. Maintenance of Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition. Make documents and Samples available at all times for the Architect's inspections.

1.3 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. During the construction period, maintain one copy of the Project Specifications, including

addenda and modifications issued, for Project Record Document purposes.

1. Mark the Specifications to indicate the actual installation where the installation varies from that indicated in Specifications and modifications issued. Note related project record drawing information, where applicable. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of product options, and information on concealed installations that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.



a. In each Specification Section where products, materials, or units of equipment are specified or scheduled, mark the copy with the proprietary name and model number of the product furnished.

b. Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made and to document coordination with record Product Data submittals and maintenance manuals.

c. Note related record Product Data, where applicable. For each principal product specified, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in maintenance manual instead of submitted as record Product Data.

2. Upon completion of markup, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's records.

1.4 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. During the construction period, maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal for Project

Record Document purposes.

B. Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where the installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submitted. Include significant changes in the product delivered to the site and changes in manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Note related Change Orders. 3. Upon completion of markup, submit a complete set of record Product Data to the

Architect for the Owner's records. 4. Where record Product Data is required as part of maintenance manuals, submit marked-

up Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as record Product Data. 1.5 RECORD SAMPLE SUBMITTAL

A. Immediately prior to date of Substantial Completion meet with the Architect and the Owner's

personnel at the site to determine which of the Samples maintained during the construction period shall be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with the Architect's instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery to the Owner's Sample storage space. Dispose of other Samples in a manner specified for disposing surplus and waste materials.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL

A. When each construction activity that requires submittal of maintenance manuals is nominally

complete, but before Substantial Completion, submit maintenance manuals specified.

1. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 RECORDING

A. Post changes and modifications to the Documents as they occur. Do not wait until the end of

the Project.



WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740-1

SECTION 01740 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual

manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.

B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in Contract Documents, to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner.

1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials.

C. Requirements for warranties for products and installations that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of these specifications.

1. During the eleventh month after the date of final acceptance of the work, the Owner, Architect, Owner’s representative and the Contractor shall review the work to confirm the requirements of the Contract have been satisfied. Any corrective work associated with the warranty will be addressed at that time, prior to the expiration of the warranty. This requirement will not modify any of the specific Contractor’s obligations relative to their Contract Agreement, specifically those relating to warranties that are in effect for a period greater than one (1) year.

D. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and Subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.

E. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.

F. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

G. Replacement Cost: On determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through part of its useful service life.

H. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.


WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740-2

1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

a. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work where a special warranty or similar commitment is required, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign commitments are willing to do so.

I. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion, submit written warranties on the Architect's request.

1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within fifteen days of completion of that designated portion of the Work.

J. When a special warranty is to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for approval prior to final execution.

K. Prepare a written document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the Contractor, or the Contractor and subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for approval prior to final execution.

1. Refer to individual Sections of the specifications for specific content, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties.

L. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper.

1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer.

2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS, the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor.

3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.


INTERIOR RENOVATIONS - @ SA PROJECT NO: 19.099 M. ALLAN VOGELSON LIBRARY CAMDEN COUNTY LIBRARY SYSTEM JUNE 2020

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02200 - 1

SECTION 02200 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 3. Refer to Division 1 "Alternates" for work and requirements related to bid alternates.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for use of premises, phasing, and Owner-occupancy requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction. Save protect and restore ready for reuse, unless noted to be delivered to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

E. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

F. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other work.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Owner will have right of first refusal to all salvaged materials. Owner will tag all items to be removed and delivered to Owner, prior to notice to proceed with demolish activities

B. Items and materials noted “to be salvaged” or “Owner’s surplus” shall remain the property of the Owner. Contractor shall obtain receipt of proof of delivery to Owner designated secure storage.



C. Documentation: Where condition of salvaged materials or adjoining construction may be subject to dispute or might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations, document existing conditions prior to start of demolition or removal.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Owner may occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Owner’s Representative of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;

immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract.

E. On site storage or sale of removed items or materials not intended for reuse on project is not

permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Owner’s Representative.

E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of photographs prior to selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.



F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before

proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building, as acceptable to governing authorities.

3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

B. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction or as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Do not cut structural members without specific approval of architect. 4. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring

existing finished surfaces. 5. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of



hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Reuse of Building Elements: Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.

C. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

D. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until reuse or delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

E. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

F. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Owner’s Representative, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

G. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. Refer to Division 7 Section for roofing requirements.

H. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Where indicated, remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.

3.5 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.



1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

2. Do not cut structural or load bearing elements unless specifically noted on structural or demolition drawings. Structural elements include: steel columns, beams, bar joists, concrete beams, columns; floor slabs, footings.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.



HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 03541 - 1

SECTION 03541 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling underlayment for application below interior floor coverings.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product certificates.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project.

B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in writing that products are compatible.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS

A. Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/4 inch (6 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following :

a. Ardex; K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete. b. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; ProSpec Level Set 200. c. MAPEI Corporation; Novoplan Easy d. Maxxon Corporation; Level-Right.

2. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219.

3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

4. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer, formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=3998&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456798199&mf=04&src=wd






B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm); or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required.

C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F (21 deg C).

D. Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath or other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.

E. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated.

1. Primer shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.

2. Primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.

2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.

1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/100 sq. m) in 24 hours.

C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer.

2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion.

3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment.



B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

D. Cure underlayment. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.

F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.



COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1

SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior nonload-bearing, cold formed steel-stud wall.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. AISI "Specifications": Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing and connections according to AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and the following:

1. Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures (CCFSS) Technical Bulletin, Vol. 2, No. 1,

February 1993 "AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections."

B. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate and erect cold-formed metal framing to withstand design loads within limits and under conditions required.

1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than

the following: a. Interior and Exterior Nonload-Bearing Curtainwall: Lateral deflection of

1/360 of the wall height. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without

damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change (range) of 120 deg F (67 deg C).

C. Design nonload-bearing curtainwall framing to accommodate lateral deflection without regard

to contribution of sheathing materials.

D. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who assumes undivided responsibility for engineering cold-formed metal framing by employing a qualified professional engineer to prepare connection calculations, shop drawings, and other structural data.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for each type of cold-formed metal framing, accessory, and product specified.

C. Shop drawings showing layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal

framing, fabrication, fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show



reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachments to other units of Work.

1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with certain design loadings,

include structural analysis data sealed and signed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible for its preparation.

D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements

specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding

Code--Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated assemblies are indicated,

provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that tested as part of an assembly for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by design designations listed in UL "Fire

Resistance Directory," or by Warnock Hersey or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer legally authorized to practice in

the jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the installation of cold-formed metal framing similar to this Project in material, design, and extent and that have a record of successful in-service performance.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid

condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Dale Industries, Inc.



2. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 3. MarinoWare; Div. of Ware Industries, Inc. 4. Or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446 (ASTM A 446M), zinc coated according to ASTM A 525 (ASTM A 525M), and as follows:

1. Coating Designation: G 60 (Z 180), G 40 (interior non load bearing studs). 2. Grade: As required by structural performance.

2.3 WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs of web depths indicated, with lipped flanges, and complying with the following thicknesses prior to coating:

1. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As required by structural performance, or as

indicated.

2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum for exterior. For interior non load bearing studs 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

3. Web: Punched.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, unpunched, of web depths indicated, with straight flanges, and complying with the following thicknesses prior to coating:

1. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: Manufacturers standard deep flange where required by design,

standard flange elsewhere. 2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa).

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless

otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Gusset plates. 5. Deflection track and vertical slide clips. 6. Stud kickers and girts. 7. Joist hangers and end closures. 8. Reinforcement plates.

2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M).

B. Cast-in-Place Anchor Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); carbon-steel hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened-steel



washers. Zinc coated by the hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Powder-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,

fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill

screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand,

ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout

containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and a 30-minute working time.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies in jig templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance

and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to manufacturer's recommendations.

5. Welding shall not be performed on material less than or equal to 33 mils (0.8mm).

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or distortion.



C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies to a maximum allowable tolerance variation

from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements, including installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cold-formed metal framing. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with

connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements of this Section.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as

standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to cold-framed metal framing manufacturer's instructions with screw penetrating joined members by not less than 3 exposed screw threads.

C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for

track or tension members.

D. Provide temporary bracing and leave in place until framing is permanently stabilized.

E. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and double studs, inaccessible upon completion of framing work.

F. Fasten reinforcement plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's

standard punched openings.

G. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:



1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.3 NONLOAD-BEARING STOREFRONT INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flanges of studs to

top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of

vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install deflection track and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in curtainwall studs, spaced in rows not more than 48 inches (1219 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Install additional row of horizontal bridging in curtainwall stud beneath deflection

track when curtainwall studs are not fastened to an additional top track. 2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, clip angle fastened to webs of punched studs.

3. Install Steel Sheet: diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom track. Fasten clip angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip

angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtainwall-framing system.

3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and

Installer to ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.



ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 3. Wood furring and grounds. 4. Wood sleepers. 5. Plywood backing panels.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.


A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency..



2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless otherwise indicated.

C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.

1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of



significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

C. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Concealed blocking. 2. Framing for non-load-bearing partitions. 3. Roof construction. 4. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: No. 2 grade.

1. Application: Framing other than interior partitions. 2. Species:

a. Douglas fir

3. Application: Exposed exterior and interior framing indicated to receive a stained or natural finish.

4. Species and Grade: As indicated on drawings for load-bearing construction of same type

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Cants. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds.



2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

C. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

D. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings, Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. KC Metals Products, Inc. 3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc. 4. USP Structural Connectors.

C. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

E. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated, unless noted otherwise.








PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

E. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

F. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

I. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood.

J. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



INTERIOR CARPENTRY 06200 - 1

SECTION 06200 – INTERIOR CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior standing and running trim.

B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For solid-surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

C. Samples: 1. Wood Trim

D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork.

B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards."

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program Labels and certificates for woodwork, including installation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Poplar

B. Wood Products:

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP

C. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.

D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.


A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use Exterior Type or Interior Type A. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Kiln-dry material after treatment.

B. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural woodwork, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing.

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.

E. Catches: 1. Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131 2. Roller catches, BHMA A156.9, B03071

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.



1. Standard Duty (Grade 1, Grade 2, and Grade 3): Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.

2. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.

3. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and 24 inches (600 mm) wide.

G. Aluminum Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9, B07063. – NOT USED

H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. – NOT USED

I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 651 for steel base. 2. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, fire-retardant-treated, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Premium. 2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove

splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

B. Interior Standing and Running Trim: 1. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,

except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 2. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation

require field assembly.

C. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets:

1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay as indicated. 2. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate as follows:

a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. b. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. c. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. d. Edges: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, matching laminate in color,

pattern, and finish.



3. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.

4. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 5. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. 6. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated on drawings 7. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above

compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

D. Plastic-Laminate Countertops:

1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated on drawings 3. Edge Treatment: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, matching laminate in color,

pattern, and finish.

2.6 SHOP FINISHING

A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling.

C. Opaque Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed vinyl. 3. Color: Match sample. 4. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). Shim as required with concealed shims.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.



F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished.

G. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not use face fastening, unless covered by trim or otherwise indicated.

H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with; a. No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing,

blocking, or hanging strips b. No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing

behind wall finish c. Toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.

I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."



PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06411 - 1

SECTION 06411 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS (VERTICAL INSTALLATION)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-faced vertical surfaces 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced

architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 06 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show large-scale details. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate

architectural cabinets. 5. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's or fabricator's standard size.



D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.

E. Samples for Verification: For the following:

1. Plastic Laminates: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required.

a. Provide one sample applied to core material with specified edge material applied to one edge.

2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm), for each color, pattern, and surface finish.

3. Corner Pieces:

a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails and at exposed end pieces, 18 inches (450 mm) high by 18 inches (450 mm) wide by 6 inches (150 mm) deep.

b. Miter joints for standing trim.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of product.

1. Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2. Thermoset decorative panels. 3. High-pressure decorative laminate. 4. Adhesives.

C. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program

D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant

B. Installer Qualifications: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Laminate manufacturer producing products in an ISO 9001 certified facility.


A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation



areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

D. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide inspections of fabrication and installation together with labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified.

2. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard.

B. Grade: Premium

C. Type of Construction: Frameless

D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wilsonart LLC; Decorative Plastic Laminates or a comparable product by one of the following:



a. Abet Laminati Inc. b. Formica Corporation. c. Lamin-Art, Inc. d. Pionite; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand.

E. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGL. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGL thermoset decorative panels. 4. Edges: ABS/PVC extruded fabrication. 5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for fixed panels

F. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS, Thermoset decorative panels.

G. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range.

a. Patterns, gloss or matte finish.

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

C. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made using ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde resins as defined in the California Air Resources Board's "Airborne Toxic Control Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products" or shall be made with no added formaldehyde.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 3. Straw-Based Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Environ Biocomposites Manufacturing LLC. 2) Sorm Incorporated.

4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.



5. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or MDF finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wilsonart LLC; Thermally Fused Laminate Panels or a comparable product by one of the following:

1) Abet Laminati Inc. 2) Arborite. 3) Lamin-Art, Inc.


A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.

2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively.

2. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulation.

3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and inspecting agency.

4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of architectural cabinets.

C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

1. For panels 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi (11 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi (2070 MPa); internal bond, 80 psi (550 kPa); and



screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf (1100 and 1000 N), respectively.

2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches (20 to 32 mm) thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi (9 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi (1720 MPa); linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf (1100 and 780 N), respectively.

3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Flakeboard Company Limited. b. SierraPine.

D. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: MDF panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Panel Source International, Inc. b. SierraPine.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

C. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.



1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times architectural cabinet fabrication will be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment.

C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. For decorative plastic laminates, comply with manufacturer's written fabrication instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed.

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet installation screws.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Clean decorative plastic laminate surfaces according to manufacturer's written care and maintenance instructions.

D. Protect completed work from damage for duration of construction period.



SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651-1

SECTION 06651 - SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS

PART 1 — GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary

conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following horizontal and trim solid surface product types:

1. Countertops

B. Related Sections include the following: 1.Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications” for Blocking. 2. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for Blocking.

W 1.3 DEFINITION

A. Solid surface is defined as nonporous, homogeneous material maintaining the same

composition throughout the part with a composition of acrylic polymer, aluminum trihydrate filler and pigment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data:

1. For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop drawings: 1. Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,

attachment devices and other components. a. Show full-size details, edge details, thermoforming requirements, attachments,

etc. b. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking

and reinforcement specified in other Sections. c. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for grommets, and other items

installed in solid surface.

C. Samples: 1. For each type of product indicated.

a. Submit minimum 6-inch by 6-inch sample in specified gloss. b. Cut sample and seam together for representation of inconspicuous seam. c. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation.

2. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for work.

D. Product data: 1. Indicate product description, fabrication information and compliance with specified

performance requirements.

E. Product certificates: 1. For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.



F. Fabricator/installer qualifications:

1. Provide copy of certification number.

G. Manufacturer certificates: 1. Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with requirements.

H. Maintenance data:

1. Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning instructions.

a. Maintenance kit for finishes shall be submitted. 2. Include in project closeout documents.


A. Qualifications: 1. Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those

required for this project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Fabricator/installer qualifications:

1. Work of this section shall be by a certified fabricator/installer, certified in writing by the manufacturer.

C. Applicable standards:

1. Standards of the following, as referenced herein: a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) d. NSF International

2. Fire test response characteristics: a. Provide with the following Class A (Class I) surface burning characteristics as

determined by testing identical products per UL 723 (ASTM E84) or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Flame Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less.

D. Coordination drawings: 1. Shall be prepared indicating:

a. Electrical work. b. Indicate location of all walls (rated and non-rated), blocking locations and

recessed wall items, etc. 2. Content:

a. Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. b. Do not base coordination drawings on reproductions of the contract

documents or standard printed data. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the contract drawings and make specific note of

dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements.

d. Provide alternate sketches to designer for resolution of such conflicts. 1) Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be

considered changes to the contract.

E. Drawings shall: 1. Be produced in 1/2-inch scale for all fabricated items.



F. Drawings must be complete and submitted to the architect

1. Coordination drawings are required for the benefit of contractor’s fabricators/installers as an aid to coordination of their work so as to eliminate or reduce conflicts that may arise during the installation of their work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation.

B. Store components indoors prior to installation.

C. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces.

1. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s warranty against defects in materials. 1. Warranty shall provide material and labor to repair or replace defective materials. 2. Damage caused by physical or chemical abuse or damage from excessive heat will not

be warranted.

B. Manufacturer’s warranty period: 1. Ten years from date of substantial completion.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide maintenance requirements as specified by the manufacturer.

PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Corian® surfaces from the DuPont company (basis of design). b. Meganite c. LG a.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Solid polymer components 1. Cast, nonporous, filled polymer, not coated, laminated or of composite construction

with through body colors meeting ANSI Z124.3 or ANSI Z124.6, having minimum physical and performance properties specified.

2. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010 inch (.25 mm) shall be repairable by sanding and/or polishing.

B. Thickness:

1. 1/2 inch C. Edge treatment:

4. As indicated



D. Backsplash: 1. Applied.

E. Sidesplash: 1. Applied.

F. Performance characteristics:

Property Typical Result Test Tensile Strength 6,000 psi ASTM D 638 Tensile Modulus 1.5 x 10-6 psi ASTM D 638 Tensile Elongation 0.4% min. ASTM D 638 Flexural Strength 10,000 psi ASTM D 790 Flexural Modulus 1.2 x 10-6 psi ASTM D 790 Hardness >85 Rockwell “M” Scale

ASTM D 785 56 Barcol Impressor

ASTM D 2583 Thermal Expansion 3.02 x 10-5 in./in./°C ASTM D 696

(1.80 x 10-5 in./in./°F) Gloss (60° Gardner) 5–75 (matte—highly polished) ANSI Z124 Light Resistance (Xenon Arc) No effect NEMA LD 3-2000

Method 3.3 Wear and Cleanability Passes ANSI Z124.3 & Z124.6 Stain Resistance: Sheets Passes ANSI Z124.3 & Z124.6 Fungus and Bacteria Resistance Does not support microbial growth ASTM G21&G22 Boiling Water Resistance No visible change NEMA LD 3-2000 Method 3.5 High Temperature Resistance No change NEMA LD 3-2000

Method 3.6 Izod Impact 0.28 ft.-lbs./in. of notch ASTM D 256 (Notched Specimen) (Method A) Ball Impact No fracture—1⁄2 lb. ball: NEMA LD 3-2000 Resistance: Sheets 1⁄4" slab—36" drop Method 3.8

1⁄2" slab—144" drop Weatherability ∆E*94<5 in 1,000 hrs. ASTM G 155 Specific Gravity † 1.7 Water Absorption Long-term ASTM D 570

0.4% (3⁄4") 0.6% (1⁄2") 0.8% (1⁄4")

Toxicity 99 (solid colors) Pittsburgh Protocol 66 (patterned colors) Test (“LC50”Test)

Flammability All colors ASTM E 84, (Class I and Class A) NFPA 255 &

UL 723 Flame Spread Index <25 Smoke Developed Index <25 † Approximate weight per square foot: 1⁄4" (6 mm) 2.2 lbs., 1⁄2" (12.3 mm) 4.4 lbs. Shapes meet or exceed the ANSI Z124.3 and ANSI Z124.6 standards for plastic sinks and lavatories.



NEMA results based on the NEMA LD 3-2000 W 2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint adhesive: 1. Manufacturer’s standard one- or two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous,

nonporous joints.

B. Sealant: 1. Manufacturer’s standard mildew-resistant, UL-listed silicone sealant in colors matching

components.

D. Conductive tape: 1. Manufacturer’s standard aluminum foil tape, with required thickness, for use with

cutouts near heat sources.

E. Insulating felt tape: 1. Manufacturer’s standard for use with conductive tape in insulating solid surface

material from adjacent heat source.

2.4 FACTORY FABRICATION

A. Shop assembly

1. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s printed instructions and technical bulletins.

2. Form joints between components using manufacturer’s standard joint adhesive without conspicuous joints.

a. Reinforce with strip of solid polymer material, 2" wide. 3. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated on the

drawings. 4. Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.

a. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. b. Smooth edges. c. Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Select from the manufacturer’s standard color chart.

1. Color: from full range of manufacturer’s colors 2. Provide surfaces with a uniform finish.

a. Matte; gloss range of 5–20.

PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with fabricator present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product data.

1. Provide product in the largest pieces available. 2. Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with joints

inconspicuous in finished work. a. Exposed joints/seams shall not be allowed. 3. Reinforce field joints with solid surface strips extending a minimum of 1 inch on either

side of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top. 4. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. 5. Rout radii and contours to template. 6. Anchor securely to base cabinets or other supports. 7. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer’s written

recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. 8. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface. 9. Install countertops with no more than 1/8-inch (3 mm) sag, bow or other variation from

a straight line.

B. Applied sidesplashes: 1. Install applied sidesplashes using manufacturer’s standard color-matched silicone

sealant. 2. Adhere applied sidesplashes to countertops using manufacturer’s standard color-

matched silicone sealant. WRIT 3.3 REPAIR

A. Repair or replace damaged work which cannot be repaired to architect’s satisfaction.


A. Keep components clean during installation.

B. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains.



FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1

SECTION 07841 - FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes 1. Through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated

constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. 2. Sealing of new and existing voids and penetrations in rated assemblies and corridor

partitions 3. Perimeter and joint systems 4. This section shall govern all firestopping work by the general contractor, other prime

contractors, subcontractors and all trades.


A. General: For penetrations through the following smoke and fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls and partitions, including fire walls, fire separations, and smoke

barriers. a. Corridor Walls are unless noted otherwise. b. Stair and MEP Shafts shall be 2 hour unless noted otherwise.

2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors: 2 hour unless noted otherwise.

3. Corridor Smoke partitions.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479: 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated,

but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures

3. L-Rated Systems: Where through-penetrations occur in smoke barriers, provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of not more than 3.0 cfm/sq. ft at both ambient temperatures and 400 deg F.



C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-

resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to

possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction and type of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting

agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items.

C. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Submittal(s) shall include summary tabulation of each through-penetration firestop system and application, along with the following information: 1. Name of installing contractor, system and/or trade (i.e. Plumbing). 2. Application and Types of penetrating items, ( i.e. insulated metal pipe smaller than 2½”). 3. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where

applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 4. Fire stopping manufacturer’s model / system number. 5. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design

designation (U.L. Number) of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 6. Color(s) of exposed sealant for each application.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm and workmen experienced in installing through-penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per manufacturers’ and listing agencies’ requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its



through-penetration firestop system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. Note, different components of the work and/or trades may use products by difference manufacturers.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified

testing and inspecting agency is UL, OPL ITS, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of

qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference

to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."


A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.



C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.

D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-penetration firestop systems indicated for each application on Drawings that are produced by one of the following manufacturers: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. RectorSeal Corporation (The). 7. Specified Technologies Inc. 8. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 9. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 10. USG Corporation.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.



2.3 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign

materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces

capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.



1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and

penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and

penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify

Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting

agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspecting Agency: Engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports.

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial



Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.



JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the applications indicated in the Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.

B. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications:

1. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Interior perimeter of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of new interior doors. f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, and floors. g. Perimeter ceiling grid molding to vertical surfaces. h. Where dissimilar material abut and no trim is indicated to conceal joint i. Other joints as indicated.

2. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. b. Other joints as indicated.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistance-rated

construction. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum

board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 3. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for sealing tile joints. 4. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" and for sealing edge moldings at

perimeters of acoustical ceilings.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.

D. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer of interior sealant systems.

F. Preconstruction Field Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

G. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing according to ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that is appropriate for the types of Project joints.

C. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution:

1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:



1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint

substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):



1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be non-staining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

C. Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-staining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, and shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance closed cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, non-outgassing in unruptured state. Size of 30% compression unless otherwise recommended by Manufacturer.

Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.




A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,

mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.

G. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage



or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Interior Joints, including the following locations: 1. Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior masonry

walls, unless indicated to receive expansion joint cover. 2. Exposed vertical surfaces of interior unit masonry walls and partitions 3. Exposed vertical joints between unit masonry and dissimilar materials. 4. Perimeter joints at frames of doors, windows, and louvers, etc. in unit masonry.

5. ONE PART URETHANE Provide one of the following Single Component Urethane

(Type S), Grade Non-Sag (NS), Class 25.), per ASTM C-920: a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I XL. b. Tremco; Vulkem 921 c. Tremco; Vulkem 116 or 931 d. Sika; 1a e. Sonneborn; NP1 f. Tremco Dymonic

B. Interior perimeter joints subject to movement.

C. Interior joints in damp or wet areas, including the following locations: 1. Between plumbing fixtures (including sinks, lavatories, drinking fountains, showers, tubs,

etc.) adjoin walls, floors, and counters. 2. Control, perimeter, and expansion joints in ceramic tile. 3. Where backsplashes of countertop with sinks, or in food service areas, abut vertical

surfaces. 4. Escutcheon plates, cabinets in toilet rooms or in food service areas. 5. Provide one of the following Single Component mildew-resistant Silicone (Type S), Grade

Non-Sag (NS), Class 25 per ASTM C-920: a. Pecora Corporation; 898. b. Tremco; Tremsill 200 c. Dow; 786 Mildew Resistant d. GE; Sanitary 1700

D. Interior Joints in drywall and gypsum plaster construction, including following locations: 1. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of doors and windows. 2. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of partitions. 3. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of new interior doors and

windows. 4. Perimeter ceiling grid molding to vertical surfaces. 5. Where dissimilar material abut and no trim is indicated to conceal joint 6. Other joints as indicated. 7. Provide one of the following Acrylic-Emulsion (Latex) Sealant One-part, nonsag, Type 5,

Grade NS Class 12.5 mildew-resistant, paintable, complying with ASTM C 834. a. Pecora Corporation; AC 20+. b. Tremco; Tremflex 834 c. Approved equal.



WOOD WINDOW REPAIRS 080152.61 - 1

SECTION 080152.61 - WOOD WINDOW REPAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl Clad Wood window repair and replacement. 2. Reglazing. 3. Window hardware repair, refinishing, and replacement.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Window: Includes window frame, sash, unless otherwise indicated by the context.



B. Shop Drawings: For repair and replacement of historic wood windows and components. Show location and extent of replacement work, with enlarged details of replacement parts indicating materials, profiles, joinery, reinforcing, method of splicing into or attaching to existing wood window, accessory items, and finishes.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified historic treatment specialist.

B. Preconstruction Test Reports: For historic treatment of wood windows.


A. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for construction, finishes, grades of wood windows, and other requirements.

B. WI Quality Standard: Comply with WI's "Manual of Millwork" for construction, finishes, grades of wood windows, and other requirements.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REPLACEMENT WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood: Clear fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) deep by 2 inches (51 mm) wide.

1. Species: Match species of each existing type of wood product, clear pine

2.2 WOOD REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Wood Consolidant: Ready-to-use product designed to penetrate, consolidate, and strengthen soft fibers of wood materials that have deteriorated due to weathering and decay and designed specifically to enhance the bond of wood-patching compound to existing wood.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Abatron, Inc.; LiquidWood. b. ConServ Epoxy LLC; Flexible Epoxy Consolidant 100. c. Wood Care Systems; ROTFIX.

B. Wood-Patching Compound: Two-part epoxy-resin wood-patching compound; knife-grade formulation as recommended by manufacturer for type of wood repair indicated, tooling time required for the detail of work, and site conditions. Compound shall be designed for filling voids in damaged wood materials that have deteriorated due to weathering and decay. Compound shall be capable of filling deep holes and spreading to feather edge.


a. Abatron, Inc.; LiquidWood with WoodEpox. b. Advanced Repair Technology, Inc.; Primatrate with Flex-Tec HV. c. ConServ Epoxy LLC; Flexible Epoxy Consolidant 100 with Flexible Epoxy

Patch 200. d. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; QuickWood. e. West System Inc.; West System. f. Wood Care Systems; ROTFIX with SCULPWOOD.

2.3 GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Glass Units: Provide insulating glass units certified through Insulating Glass Certification Council as conforming to the requirements of IGCC and ASTM E2190

B. Manufacturer Designation: Andersen Low-E4 Glass with HeatLock Technology.

C. Glazing Configuration: Dual pane.

D. Seal and Spacer Type: Dual sealed insulating glass units with polyisobutylene primary seal, silicone secondary seal and stainless steel spacers.















E. Glass Type: Annealed glass, ASTM C1036.

2.4 WINDOW HARDWARE

A. General: Provide complete sets of window hardware consisting of sash balances, hinges, pulls, latches, and accessories indicated for each window or required for proper operation. Window hardware shall smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock wood windows and be sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions.

B. Replacement Window Hardware: Replace existing damaged or missing window hardware with new hardware.

C. Material and Design:

1. Material: Solid bronze of alloy indicated] [Cast or wrought aluminum] 2. Design: Match existing hardware. 3. Replacement Window Hardware: Match existing window hardware.

D. Window Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18 for base material and finish requirements indicated.

2.5 WOOD WINDOWS

A. General: Provide windows complying with the performance requirements indicated and tested ac-cording to NAFS.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Andersen Corporation;

Andersen 400 Series windows. C. Substitution Limitations: No substitutions

D. Wood Window Sash: Custom-fabricated replacement wood windows and trim, with operating and latching hardware; fabricated according AWI Section 1000 requirements for Custom Grade.

1. Wood Species: Match wood species of exterior window trim and frame parts 2. Wood Window Members and Trim: Match profiles and detail of existing window

members and trim. 3. Glazing Stops: Provide replacement glazing stops coordinated with glazing system

indicated. 4. Integral, Screen Sash Inserts: Manufacturer's standard aluminum-framed sash inserts;

sash-insert frames recessed fully in rebates routed in window frame or sash as required; and secured with turn-button hardware. Provide insect screen for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. Shop finish sash inserts to match window frame.

5. Exposed Hardware: Match existing exposed window hardware. 6. Weather Stripping: Full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash.

2.5 WEATHER STRIPPING

A. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action; completely concealed when window is closed.



1. Weather-Stripping Material: Match existing materials and profiles as much as possible unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric; complying with AAMA 701/702.

1. Weather Seals: Elastomeric preformed seal with integral barrier fin or fins of semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material.

C. Metal Weather Stripping: [Bronze] [Zinc] <Insert metal> weather stripping as indicated on Drawings; designed either as one piece to seal by sliding into a groove in the sash or as two pieces that interlock with each other; and completely concealed when wood window is closed.


A. Borate Preservative Treatment: Inorganic, borate-based solution, with disodium octaborate tetrahydrate as the primary ingredient; manufactured for preserving weathered and decayed wood from further damage by decay fungi and wood-boring insects; complying with AWPA P5; containing no boric acid.

B. Cleaning Materials:

1. Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups (0.5 L) of tetrasodium polyphosphate, 1/2 cup (125 mL) of laundry detergent that contains no ammonia, 5 quarts (5 L) of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 15 quarts (15 L) of warm water for each 5 gal. (20 L) of solution required.

2. Mildewcide: Provide commercial proprietary mildewcide or a solution prepared by mixing 1/3 cup (80 mL) of household detergent that contains no ammonia, 1 quart (1 L) of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 3 quarts (3 L) of warm water.

C. Adhesives: Wood adhesives for exterior exposure, with minimum 15- to 45-minute cure at 70 deg F (21 deg C), in gunnable and liquid formulations as recommended by adhesive manufacturer for each type of repair.

D. Fasteners: Fasteners of same basic metal as fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. Use metals that are noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined.

1. Match existing fasteners in material and type of fastener unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use concealed fasteners for interconnecting wood components. 3. Use concealed fasteners for attaching items to other work unless exposed fasteners are

unavoidable or the existing fastening method. 4. For exposed fasteners, use Phillips-type machine screws of head profile flush with metal

surface unless otherwise indicated. 5. Finish exposed fasteners to match finish of metal fastened unless otherwise indicated.

E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc-coated steel complying with requirements in ASTM B 633 for SC 3 (Severe) service condition.

2.7 WOOD WINDOW FINISHES

A. Construction:



1. Frame: Finger-jointed or laminated veneer lumber capped with rigid vinyl, pre-

servative treated WDMA I.S. 4. 2. Interior Sash: Solid lumber, kiln dried and suitable for stain or painted finish, pre-

servative treated WDMA I.S. 4. 3. Exterior Sash: Co-extruded rigid vinyl or liquid-applied vinyl over finger-jointed

lumber. B. Wood Species: Clear pine C. Interior Finish:

1. Painted: Factory-applied before assembly, white

D. Exterior Finish:

1. Frame and Sash: AAMA 613 for color retention, Color as selected from manufacturer’s standard colors, White to match existing to remain

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent materials from damage by historic treatment of wood windows.

B. Clean existing wood windows of mildew, algae, moss, plant material, loose paint, grease, dirt, and other debris by scrubbing with bristle brush or sponge and detergent solution. Scrub mildewed areas with mildewcide. After cleaning, rinse thoroughly with fresh water. Allow to dry before repairing or painting.

C. Condition replacement wood members and replacement windows to prevailing conditions at installation areas before installing.

3.2 REPAIR PROCEDURES, GENERAL

A. General:

1. Apply each product according to manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

2. Stabilize and repair wood windows to reestablish structural integrity and weather resistance while maintaining the existing form of each item.

3. Stop the progress of deterioration by removing coatings and applying borate preservative treatment before repair.

4. Repair items in place where possible 5. Replace items where indicated or scheduled.

B. Repair Wood Windows: Match existing materials and features, retaining as much original material as possible to perform repairs.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, repair wood windows by consolidating, patching, splicing, or otherwise reinforcing wood with new wood matching existing wood.



2. Where indicated, repair wood windows by limited replacement matching existing material.

C. Replace Wood Window Units: Where indicated, replace units with new vinyl clad units.

1. Do not use substitute materials unless otherwise indicated.

D. Protection of Openings: Where sash or windows are indicated for removal, cover resultant openings with temporary enclosures so that openings are weathertight during repair period.

E. Identify removed windows, sash, and members with numbering system corresponding to window locations to ensure reinstallation in same location. Key windows, sash, and members to Drawings showing location of each removed unit. Permanently stamp units in a location that will be concealed after reinstallation.

3.3 GLAZING

A. Remove cracked and damaged glass and glazing materials where indicated on drawings and prepare surfaces for reglazing.

B. Install new glass with insulated glazed unit.

C. Disposal of Removed Glass: Remove from Owner's property and legally dispose of it unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 WOOD WINDOW PATCH-TYPE REPAIR

A. General: Patch wood members that are damaged and exhibit depressions, holes, or similar voids, and that have limited rotted or decayed wood.

1. Treat wood members with wood consolidant prior to application of patching compound. Allow treatment to harden before filling void with patching compound.

2. Remove rotted or decayed wood down to sound wood.

B. Apply borate preservative treatment to accessible surfaces either before applying wood consolidant or after removing rotted or decayed wood.

C. Apply wood-patching compound to fill depressions, nicks, cracks, and other voids created by removed or missing wood.

1. Apply patching compound in layers as recommended by manufacturer until the void is completely filled.

2. Finish patch surface to match contour of adjacent wood member. Sand patching compound smooth and flush, matching contour of existing wood member.

3.5 WOOD WINDOW MEMBER-REPLACEMENT REPAIR

A. General: Replace parts of or entire wood window members at locations indicated on Drawings and where damage is too extensive to patch.

1. Remove sash from windows before performing member-replacement repairs unless otherwise indicated.



2. Remove broken, rotted, and decayed wood down to sound wood. 3. Secure new wood using finger joints or multiple dowels with adhesive and nailing to

ensure maximum structural integrity at each splice. Use only concealed fasteners. Fill nail holes and patch surface to match surrounding wood.

B. Apply borate preservative treatment to accessible surfaces after replacements are made.

C. Repair remaining depressions, holes, or similar voids with patch-type repairs.

D. Glazing: Reglaze units prior to reinstallation. 1. Provide replacement glazing stops coordinated with glazing system indicated. 2. Provide glazing stops to match contour of sash frames.

E. Reinstall units removed for repair into original openings.

F. Weather Stripping: Replace nonfunctioning and install missing weather stripping to ensure full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash.

3.6 WOOD WINDOW UNIT REPLACEMENT

A. General: Replace existing vinyl clad wood window or sash units with new custom-fabricated units to match existing at locations indicated on Drawings and where damage is too extensive to repair.

B. Apply borate preservative treatment to accessible surfaces before finishing.

C. Mill glazed members to accommodate glass thickness. Glaze units prior to installation.

D. Install units level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing, trim, and other adjacent construction.

E. Set sill members in bed of sealant for weathertight construction unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install window units with new anchors into existing openings.

G. Weather Stripping: Install full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash.

H. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

I. Disposal of Removed Units: Remove from Owner's property and legally dispose of them unless otherwise indicated.

END OF SECTION 080152.61


HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08121-1

SECTION 08121 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal frames.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 08211 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in hollow-metal frames.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.

C. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.


A. Product test reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 5. Republic Doors and Frames. 6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.










2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings and temperature-rise limits indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

2.3 INTERIOR FRAMES

A. Standard-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1.

1. Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4. 2. Materials: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm). 3. Construction: Knocked down. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as follows:

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials.

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).



H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08800 "Glazing."

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c.

5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers.

C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation

of hollow-metal work for hardware.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1

SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware in flush wood doors. 2. Division 8 Section “Steel Frames and Doors” for steel door frames.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples: For factory-finished doors.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated”.

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to [NFPA 252] [UBC Standard 7-2] [or] [UL 10B] [UL 10C].



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 2. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 3. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 4. Oshkosh Architectural Door Co. 5. Weyerhaeuser Company.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Extra Heavy Duty: assembly spaces.

C. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

3. Provide doors with either glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.

D. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:

1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.

a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N). b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf (1780 N).

E. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

F. Mineral-Core Doors:

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.



2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species: Red oak, or species to match existing wood doors to remain. 3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 7. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber. 8. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit

abrasive planed before veneering. 9. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

2.5 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed 3. Staining: Match existing wood doors to remain. 4. Effect: Filled finish 5. Sheen: Semi-gloss.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.



FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER (FRP) PANELS • ALUMINUM DOOR PERIMETER & STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM • MONUMENTAL STILE & RAIL DOORS • GLAZING • FINISH HARDWARE 08255/08410/08120-1

08255/08410 /08120 -FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER (FRP) PANELS • ALUMINUM DOOR PERIMETER & STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM • MONUMENTAL STILE & RAIL DOORS •

GLAZING • FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, equipment, and services required to remove existing frames, doors and hardware as required to install new frames, doors, hardware, glazing, etc. In general, the work under this section includes the following:

1. The removal of all necessary portions of existing frames, doors, hardware and related

entrance material to permit the installation of new material as specified hereafter. Material removed shall be disposed of by contractor or salvaged as directed by the architect and/or owner.

2. New masonry opening construction will not require removal of existing doors and frames 3. The furnishing and installation of frames, doors, hardware, glazing and caulking as 1 required for a complete installation including all necessary cleaning and adjustments.

B. The following types of doors, frames and accessories are required:

1. Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) Panels

2. Aluminum Door Perimeter & Storefront Framing System

3. Monumental Aluminum Stile & Rail Doors

4. Glazing

5. Hardware

6. Caulking C. Related Sections

1. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers

2. Section 08700 - Finish Hardware

3. Section 08800 – Glazing



1.3 REFERENCES – Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) Panel SECTION 08255 (08 17 43), Monumental Stile & Rail Door SECTION 08120 (08 11 16)

A. AAMA 1503-98 - Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors

and Glazed Wall Sections.

B. ANSI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Re-inforcings.

C. ASTM B 117 - Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

D. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

E. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

F. ASTM D 256 - Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Notched Specimens of

Plastics.

G. ASTM D 543 - Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents.

H. ASTM D 570 - Water Absorption of Plastics.

I. ASTM D 638 - Tensile Properties of Plastics.

J. ASTM D 790 - Flexural Properties of Non-reinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.

K. ASTM D 1308 - Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes.

L. ASTM D 1621 - Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

M. ASTM D 1623 - Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

N. ASTM D 2126 - Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging.

O. ASTM D 2583 - Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor.

P. ASTM D 5420 – Impact Resistance of Flat Rigid Plastic Specimens by Means of a Falling

Weight.

Q. ASTM D 6670-01 - Standard Practice for Full-Scale Chamber Determination of Volatile Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products.

R. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

S. ASTM E 90 - Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building

Partitions.

T. ASTM E 283 - Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

U. ASTM E 330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by

Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.



V. ASTM E 331 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by

Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

W. ASTM F 476 - Security of Swinging Door Assemblies.

X. ASTM F 1642-04 – Standard Test Method for Glazing Systems Subject to Air blast loading.

Y. NWWDA T.M. 7-90 –Cycle Slam Test Method

Z. SFBC PA 201 - Impact Test Procedures.

AA. SFBC PA 203 - Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading.

AB. SFBC 3603.2 (b) (5) - Forced Entry Resistance Test.

AC. ASTM E 1886 – Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors, and Storm Shutters Impacted by Missile (s) and exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials.

1.4 REFERENCES – SECTION 08410 (08 43 13) Aluminum Door Perimeter & Storefronts Framing System

A. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

B. ASTM D 1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Form).

C. ASTM D 2000 - Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications.

D. ASTM D 6670-01 - Standard Practice for Full-Scale Chamber Determination of Volatile

Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS – Monumental Stile & Rail Doors

A. General: Provide door assemblies that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified performance requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer’s corresponding standard systems.

B. Air Infiltration: For a single door, test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a pressure differential of 6.24 psf. Door shall not exceed 0.01 cfm per square foot.

C. Uniform Structural Load: For a single door, test specimen shall be tested in accordance with

ASTM E 330. Plus, or minus 67.5 pounds per square foot.

D. Water Resistance: For a single door, test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at a pressure differential of 3.75 psf. No leakage.

E. Large Missile Impact: Single impact. Pass.

F. Indoor air quality testing per ASTM D 6670-01: GREENGUARD Environmental Institute

Certified including GREENGUARD for Children and Schools Certification.



1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS – Aluminum Door Perimeter & Storefront Framing Systems.

A. General: Provide framing systems that comply with specified design and performance requirements based on testing of current products.

B. Thermal Movement: Design framing systems to provide for expansion and contraction of

component materials. C. Indoor air quality testing per ASTM D 6670-01: GREENGUARD Environmental Institute Certified including GREENGUARD for Children and Schools Certification.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01330 (01 33 00) – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit door manufacturer’s product data, including description of materials,

components, fabrication, finishes, and installation.

C. Submit one set of factory shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of the Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) Doors, Panels and Aluminum Frames, and associated components of the work. Include wall elevations at 1/2" scale, and half-sized detail sections of every typical composite member. Show anchors, joint system, expansion provisions, and other components not included in the manufacturer's standard data. Include field-verified dimensions and glazing details and include Catalog cuts for all Finish Hardware.

D. Samples:

1. FRP Insulated Panel: Submit corner samples of manufacturer’s panel showing face

sheets, core and finish.

a. The architect reserves the right to require samples of typical fabricated sections, showing joints, exposing fastenings, (if any) quality of workmanship, hardware and accessory items, before fabrication of the work proceeds.

2. Framing: Submit manufacturer’s corner samples of Aluminum Door Perimeter &

Storefront Framing showing, glazing and finish. 3. Stile & Rail Door: Submit manufacturer’s sample of doors showing, rails, framing,

hardware, glazing and finish. 4. Color: Submit manufacturer’s color chip samples of Standard Pebble texture for

Panel Skins and Painted finished at the Door Stiles & Rails, Aluminum Door Perimeter & Storefront Framing.

E. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from qualified independent testing agency

indicating doors comply with specified performance requirements.

F. Manufacturer’s Project References: Submit list of successfully completed projects including project name and location, name of architect, and type and quantity of doors manufactured.



G. Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer’s maintenance and cleaning instructions for doors, including maintenance and operating instructions for hardware.

H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty.


A. Standards: Comply with the requirements and recommendations in applicable specifications and standards by NAAMM, AAMA and AA, including the terminology definitions and specifically including the "Entrance Manual" by NAAMM, except to the extent more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Code Compliance and Regulations: All materials supplied shall be in accordance with the

International Building Code, State of New Jersey “Barrier-Free” Subcode, and all applicable State or Local Codes.

C. Manufacturer shall have produced Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester/Aluminum Hybrid (FRP)

Doors, Panels and Aluminum Frames for not less than 25 years and shall have completed projects like this building in type and size.

1. Obtain Doors, Frames and Components through one source from a single

manufacturer.

D. Bidders are expected to visit the jobsite to make a complete survey of project requirements prior to bid. All dimensions, quantities and conditions relating to the installation shall be fully understood. Failure to visit the site will not relieve the successful bidder from the responsibility of furnishing all materials and services required to comply with the true intent and meaning of the specifications without any additional costs to the owner.

E. Instructions: The manufacturer or representatives will be available for consultation to all

parties engaged in the project, including instruction to installation personnel.

F. An examination of product will include cutting and/or disassembly of the entrance to reveal the construction of the component. If the door, frame or component fails, replacement of the project’s material will be required. This process will assure the owner of proper adherence to the bid documents.

1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All materials supplied shall be delivered to the jobsite in their original, unopened packages, with labels intact. Materials shall be inspected for damage, and the manufacturer shall be advised immediately of any discrepancies. Unsatisfactory materials are not to be used.

B. All materials supplied shall be packaged in individual corrugated cartons. Doors and panels

shall be "floated" within cartons, with no portion of the door having contact with the outer shell of the container.

C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation.

1.10 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY



A. Provide a written warranty, signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to

replace, at no cost to the Owner, any doors, frames or panels that fail in materials or workmanship, within the time of acceptance, as indicated below.

1. Failure of materials or workmanship includes excessive deflection, faulty operation of

entrances, deterioration of finish, or construction, more than normal weathering and defects in hardware, weather-stripping and other components of the work.

B. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from approved date of substantial completion as determined by architect. C. Limited Lifetime Warranty covering the following:

1. Failure of corner joinery.

2. Core deterioration.

3. Delamination or bubbling of door skin. D. Factory Installed Hardware: for a period of ten (10) years:

1. Hardware is installed in accordance with the hardware manufacturer’s specifications and instructions. 2. Hardware is securely mounted and, in normal usage, will not separate from the

door.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Products listed herein are as manufactured by Special-Lite, Inc., PO Box 6, Decatur, Michigan 49045. Toll Free (800) 821-6531. Phone (269) 423-7068. Fax (800) 423-7610. Web Site www.special-lite.com. E-Mail [email protected], and shall be considered the basis-of-design for the work of this section. Comparable products by other manufacturers may be submitted for consideration as equal, subject to the requirements of Division 1. NJ Sales Rep: Joseph Boltzer, 862-266-7344. Subject to exact compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or one of the followings:

1. Vista Wall, Inc. – Lincoln, Rhode Island 2. Tubelite, Inc. – Reed City, Michigan

B. Equivalents: Subject to compliance with all material and performance requirements outlined

in these specifications, “or equal” products by other manufacturers will be considered for use subject to review by the Architect. The Architect’s decision regarding equivalency is final.




2.2 MONUMENTAL STILE & RAIL DOORS

A. Model: SL-15 wide stile monumental aluminum stile & rail doors.

B. Door Opening Size: As indicated on the Drawings.

C. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

E. Stiles and Rails:

1. Material: Aluminum extrusions made from prime-equivalent billet that is produced from 100% reprocessed 6063-T5 alloy recovered from industrial processes, 0.125- inch minimum wall thickness, 1-piece.

2. Stile Width: 4-1/2 inches.

3. Rail Width: a. Top: 6-1/2 inches.

b. Bottom: 10 inches.

F. Corners:

1. True mortise and tenon joints. 2. Full-width 3/8-inch diameter galvanized steel tie rods secured with locking hex nuts.

F. Welding of Joints: Not permitted.

G. Mid Rail:

1. Width: 6-1/2 inches. 2. One-piece extrusion with integral exterior glass stops. 3. Secure to vertical stiles with mortise and tenon joints and 3/8-inch diameter

galvanized steel tie rod with locking hex nuts. 2.4 ALUMINUM PERIMETER DOOR & STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM

A. Model: 1. Specify Model SL-260FG Aluminum Perimeter & Storefront Framing System.

B. Framing Size:

1. Specify frame size 2” X 6” as per Section 2.3 subsection A.

2. Material: Aluminum extrusions made from prime-equivalent billet that is produced from 100% reprocessed 6063-T5 alloy recovered from industrial processes.



3. Jambs, Mullions, Sills, Horizontal Intermediates, and Headers: 0.125-inch wall thickness. 4. Lock Jambs, Hinge Jambs, and Door Headers: 0.125-inch minimum wall thickness.

C. Applied Door Stops: 0.625 inch with screws and weather stripping. Door stop will incorporate pressure gasketing for weathering seal. Counterpunch fastener holes in door stop to preserve full metal thickness under fastener head.

D. Frame Members: Box type with 4 enclosed sides. Open back framing is not acceptable.

E. Caulking: Caulk joints before assembling frame members.

F. Joints:

i. Secure joints with fasteners

ii. Provide hairline butt joint appearance.

G. Field Fabrication: Field fabrication of framing using stick materials is not acceptable.

H. Applied Stops: For side, transom, and borrowed lites and panels, with fasteners exposed on interior or un-secure portion only. Applied stops will incorporate pressure gasketing for weathering seal. Reinforce with solid bar stock fill for all frame hardware attachments.

I. Hardware:

a) Pre-machine and reinforce frame members for hardware in accordance with

manufacturer’s standards and hardware schedule.

b) Factory Install hardware.

J. Anchors:

a) Anchors appropriate for wall conditions to anchor framing to wall materials.

b) Door Jamb and Header Mounting Holes: Maximum of 24-inch centers.

c) Secure head and sill members of transom, side lites, and similar conditions.

K. Side Lites:

a) Factory pre-assembled side lites to greatest extent possible.

b) Mark frame assemblies according to location.

L. Fasteners:

1. Material: Aluminum, 18-8 stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal. 2. Compatibility: Compatible with items to be fastened. 3. Exposed Fasteners: Screws with finish matching items to be fastened.

M. Glazing Gaskets: Gaskets installed in captive assembly of glazing stops.



1. EPDM: ASTM D 2000 2. Closed-Cell Foam: ASTM D 1667

L. Applied Door Stops: 0.625 inch with screws and weather stripping. Door stop will incorporate pressure gasketing for weathering seal. Counterpunch fastener holes in door stop to preserve full metal thickness under fastener head.

M. Frame Members: Box type with 4 enclosed sides. Open back framing is not acceptable.

N. Caulking: Caulk joints before assembling frame members.

O. Field Fabrication: Field fabrication of framing using stick materials is not acceptable.

2.5 MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES – Aluminum Stile & Rail Doors

A. Aluminum Members: Provide alloy and temper as recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and control of color; ASTM B 221 for extrusions, ASTM B 209 for sheet/plate, with a minimum wall thickness of 0.125"

B. All materials shall be of the same manufacturer. No splitting of Door, Frame or

components will be permitted. C. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other non-corrosive metal

fasteners, guaranteed by the manufacturer to be compatible with the doors, frames, stops, panels, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. For exposed fastener (if any), provide Vandal-proof flat head screws with finish matching the item to be fastened.

1. Do not use exposed fasteners, except where unavoidable for the assembly of units, or

unavoidable for the fastening of hardware. Provide only concealed screws in glazing stops.

D. Reinforcement and Brackets: Manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated steel units, of

shapes, plates, or bars, with 2.0 ounce hot-dip zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 123, applied after fabrication.

E. Expansion Anchor Devices: Lead shield or toothed steel, drill-in, expansion bolt anchors.

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold applied asphalt mastic complying with SPC-PS 12, compounded

for 30-mil thickness per coat.

G. Sealants and Gaskets: Provide sealants and gaskets in the fabrication, assembly and installation of the work, which are recommended by the manufacturer to remain permanently elastic, non-shrinking, non-migrating and weatherproof.

H. Glazing Gaskets: For glazing factory-installed glass, and for gaskets, which are factory-

installed in "captive" assembly of glazing stops, provide manufacturer's standard stripping of molded neoprene, complying with ASTM D 2000 (Designation 2BC415 to 3 BC620), or molded PVC complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4.



2.6 FABRICATION

A. Sizes and Profiles: The required sizes for door and frame units, and profiles requirements are to be “field verified”.

B. Co-ordination of Fabrication: Check the actual frame or door openings in the construction

work by accurate field measurements before fabrication and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings.

C. Assembly:

1. Complete the cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of all metal work prior to the cleaning, finishing, treatment and application for coatings. 2. Remove burrs from cut edges, and ease edges and corners to a radius of approximately 1/64".

D. Welding: No Welding of any Door or Frame joints will be accepted.

E. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners, wherever possible, except as otherwise noted.

F. Fit:

1. Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles.

2. Provide secure attachments and support at mechanical joints, with hairline fit at contacting members.

G. Reinforce the work as necessary for performance requirements and as required for support

to the structure. Separate dissimilar metals and bituminous paint or performed separators, which will prevent corrosion. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with non-metallic separators to prevent "freeze-up" of joints.

H. Sealant- for Heavy Wall Tube-Aluminum Frame, use silicone sealant as specified in Section 07900 (07 90 00).

2.7 ARCHITECTURAL FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER (FRP) PANELS

A. FRP PANELS:

1. Model: SL-37 Insulated Architectural Panels with SpecLite3® FRP face sheets.

2. Thickness: 1 inch and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Face Sheets:

1. Material: SpecLite3 FRP, 0.120-inch thickness, finish color throughout. Abuse- resistant engineered surface.

2. Texture: Pebble.

3. Color: Manufacturer’s twelve (12) Standard.



C. Insulated Speclite3 FRP Panels:

1. Insulated Panels: Two 0.120-inch minimum thickness sheets. 2. Core: Foam polyurethane core of a minimum of 5 pounds per cubic foot density. 3. Form components to function as single unit. 4. R-Value: Maximum of 4.3 for 1” inch panels.

5. U-Value: Maximum of 0.23 for 1” inch panels.

6. CRF: Minimum of 81 for 1” inch panels.

D. Class A Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating:

1. Class A flame spread, and smoke developed rating on interior faces of exterior panels and both faces of interior panels.

2. Flame Spread, ASTM E 84: Maximum of 25. 3. Smoke Developed, ASTM E 84: Maximum of 450.

2.8 HARDWARE

A. Premachine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers

and hardware schedule. B. Factory install hardware.

C. Hardware schedule: As specified in Section 08710 (08 71 00).

1. Concealed Adjustable Bottom Brush: Install door manufacturer’s SL-301 multidirectional adjustable bottom with double nylon brush weather-stripping. Door bottom must be concealed and adjust to accommodate irregular tapered floor conditions.

2. Concealed adjustable meeting stile astragal: Install door manufacturer’s AS-4A adjustable astragal with double pile and weather seal weather-stripping.

D. Finish: Clear and or from full range of manufacturer’s colors as selected by the Architect. 2.9 GLAZING AND VISION LITES

A. Provide glazing system for doors and frames to receive lites. Design system for replacement of glass, but for non-removal of glass from the exterior.

1. For Frames, provide manufacturer's standard "surface glazing" system of channels and

captive glazing gaskets.



2. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from the building structure. Allow for thermal expansion on exterior units.

3. All glass in doors is to be factory installed.

4. Glass for doors and aluminum frames to be: As detailed on drawings. Refer to Section

08800.

B. Factory Glazing: 1/4-inch tempered glass for doors

C. Rectangular Vision Lites: FL-Series

1. FL-Series shall be factory glazed with ¼” glass.

3. Size: Half Top and Bottom Lite as indicated on drawings. 4. FL-Series: Factory glazed with screw-applied aluminum stops anodized to match

perimeter door stile and rails.

2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES

Preparation: Prior to fabrication of doors and frames, prepare the aluminum surfaces or finishing in accordance with the Aluminum Producer's recommendations, and the standards of the Finisher or Processor. Process all components of each assembly simultaneously to attain complete uniformity of color.

A. Painted Finish:

1. High-Performance Organic Coating: AAC12C42R1X (Chemical Finish: Cleaned with

inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: Chemical conversion coating, acid chromate-floride-phosphate pre-treatment; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pre-treat and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions. (Trade name for this process: KYNAR).

2. Fluorocarbon 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer’s standard 2-coat thermocured system, complying with AAMA 605.2, composed of specifically formulated inhibitive primer and fluorocarbon color top coat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinyldene florid resin by weight. a. Color: Select from Manufacturer’s Standard Color Chart.

2.11 FINISH HARDWARE

A. Refer to Hardware Sets of Section 08700 for the Finish Hardware required for this project.

1. List the approved Finish Hardware items to be supplied and installed by the door / frame manufacturer on submissions.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect

Installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance. 3.3 INSTALLATION – Monumental Stile & Rail Doors

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install doors plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack.

C. Anchor frames securely in place. D. Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means

approved by Architect. E. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and backseal.

F. Install exterior doors to be weathertight in closed position. G. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as

approved by Architect.

H. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect.

3.4 INSTALLATION – Frames

A. Install framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install framing systems plumb, level, square, true to line, and weathertight, without warp or rack.

C. Install doors as specified in Section 08255.

D. Anchor framing securely in place. E. Tolerances: Install framing systems in accordance with the following tolerances:

1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of length or 1/4 inch in any total length. 2. Offset from Alignment: Maximum offset from true alignment between 2 identical members abutting end to end in line shall not exceed 1/16 inch.



3. Diagonal Measurements: Maximum difference in diagonal measurements shall not exceed 1/8 inch. 4. Offset at Corners: Maximum out-of-plane offset of framing at corners shall not exceed 1/32 inch.

E. Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means

approved by Architect.

G. Set sills, door thresholds, and other members in bed of sealant or with joint fillers or gaskets to provide weathertight construction. Comply with Section 07900 (07 90 00).

H. Install sill flashing to make frame watertight at sill.

I. Glass: Install glass indicated to be glazed into framing, and not preglazed, as specified in Section 08800 (08 80 00).

J. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect.

K. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect.


A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for installation of doors.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors, hinges, and locksets for smooth operation without binding. 3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean doors/framing systems promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish or glazing.

3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed doors/framing systems to ensure that, except for normal weathering,

doors/framing systems will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

End of Section 08255/08410/08120


DOOR HARDWARE 087100-1

SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Mechanical (and electrified) door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors. c. Gates.

2. Field verification, preparation and modification of existing doors and frames to receive new door hardware.

B. Exclusions: Hardware for the following is not provided under the scope of this section, unless specifically listed in the hardware sets:

1. Windows 2. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets 3. Signage 4. Toilet accessories 5. Overhead doors

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section “Alternates” for alternates affecting the work of this section. 2. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealant requirements applicable to threshold

installation under the work of this section. 3. Division 09 Sections for touchup finishing or refinishing of existing openings modified by

the work of this section.



1.3 REFERENCES

A. Applicable state and local building codes and standards.

B. Fire/Life Safety

1. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

a. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code b. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows c. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code d. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies

2. State and/or City Fire Safety Code

C. UL - Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies 2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies 3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware

D. Accessibility

1. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act. 2. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

E. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute

1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule 2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware

F. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements.

2. Advise Architect within the submittal package of incompatibility or issues which may detrimentally affect the work of this section.

3. Prior to Forwarding Submittal: Comply with procedures for verifying existing door and frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, “EXAMINATION” article, herein.



B. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data: Product data including manufacturers’ technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

2. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of the hardware schedule, submit details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:

a. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including the following:

1) Details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems.

2) Schematic diagram of systems that interface with electrified door hardware. 3) Point-to-point wiring. 4) Risers.

3. Samples for Verification: If requested by the Architect, submit production sample or sample installations as requested of each type of exposed hardware unit in the finish indicated, and tagged with a full description for coordination with the schedule.

a. Samples will be returned to the supplier in like-new condition. Units that are acceptable to the Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements.

4. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by the Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, Include the following information:

a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number.

b. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet; list locking device and function for each opening.

c. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. d. Name and manufacturer of each item. e. Fastenings and other pertinent information. f. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. g. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. h. Mounting locations for hardware. i. Door and frame sizes and materials. j. Name and phone number for the local manufacturer's representative for each

product. k. Operational Description of openings with any electrified hardware (locks, exits,

electromagnetic locks, electric strikes, automatic operators, door position switches, magnetic holders or closer/holder units, and/or access control components). Operational description should include how the door will operate on egress, ingress, and fire/smoke alarm connection.

1) Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.



5. Key Schedule:

a. After a keying meeting between representatives of the Owner, Architect, hardware supplier—provide a keying schedule listing the levels of keying as well as an explanation of the key system's function, the key symbols used and the door numbers controlled.

b. Utilize ANSI A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as a guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting the optimal keying system.

c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations.

d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions.

e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion.

1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by means as directed by Owner.

f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks.

6. Templates: After final approval of the hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware.

C. Informational Submittals:

1. Qualification Data: For Supplier, Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. 2. Product Certificates for electrified door hardware, signed by the manufacturer:

a. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.

3. Certificates of Compliance:

a. Upon request of Architect or Authority Having Jurisdiction certificates of compliance for fire-rated hardware and installation instructions shall be made available.

4. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.

5. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.



D. Closeout Submittals:

1. Operations and Maintenance Data : Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include the following:

a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.

b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. d. Parts list for each product. e. Copy of final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as-installed. f. Copy of final keying schedule. g. As-installed wiring diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low

voltage and 110 volts. h. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to

identify the project.


A. Product Substitutions: For the purpose of performing the work of this section, comply with product requirements stated in Division 01 and as specified herein.

B. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: A recognized architectural hardware supplier that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work for consultation.

1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

4. Coordination Responsibility: Coordinate installation of the electronic security hardware with the Architect and electrical engineers and provide installation and technical data to the Architect and other related subcontractors.

a. Upon completion of electronic security hardware installation, inspect and verify that all components are working properly.

C. Installer Qualifications: Qualified tradesmen, skilled in the application of commercial grade hardware that has a record of successful in-service performance for installing door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project.



D. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who can meet the following qualification requirements:

1. For door hardware, DHI-certified, Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). 2. Can provide installation and technical data to the Architect and other related

subcontractors. 3. Can inspect and verify components are in working order upon completion of installation. 4. Capable of producing wiring diagrams. 5. Capable of coordinating installation of the electrified hardware with the Architect and

electrical engineers.

E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer.

1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.

F. Fire-Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

G. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water.

H. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.



J. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES” article, herein.

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).

2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door.

b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high [and] [3/4 inch (19 mm) high for exterior sliding doors].

4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

K. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01.

1. Attendees: Owner, Contractor, Architect, Installer, Supplier’s Architectural Hardware Consultant.

2. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion.

b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys.

L. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

M. Coordination Conferences:

1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold a meeting for the purpose of reviewing any questions or concerns related to the proper installation and adjustment of door hardware.

a. Attendees: doors hardware supplier, door hardware installer, Contractor. b. After the meeting, provide letter of compliance to the Architect, indicating when the

meeting was held and who was in attendance.




A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

1. Each article of hardware shall be individually packaged in manufacturer’s original packaging.

C. Project Conditions:

1. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods.

2. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

D. Protection and Damage:

1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping with exactly the same products. 2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace

or repair products damaged during the course of the Work. 3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical

agent.

E. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

F. Deliver keys (and permanent cores) to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

C. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.

D. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.

E. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation.

F. Direct shipments not permitted, unless approved by the Contractor.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Years from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated.

a. Closers:

1) Mechanical: 10 years. 2) Electrified: 2 years.

b. Exit Devices:

1) Mechanical: 3 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year.

c. Locksets:

1) Mechanical: 3 years. 2) Electrified: 1 year.

d. Continuous Hinges: Lifetime warranty e. Key Blanks: Lifetime

2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation, improper use or abuse.



1.9 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools:

1. Furnish One (1) complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. The Awarding Authority has determined that certain products will be selected for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability to insure continuity of existing and future performance and maintenance standards. After investigating available product offerings the Awarding Authority has elected to prepare proprietary specifications. These products are specified with the notation: “No Substitute.”

B. Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein

C. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown.

D. Where the hardware specified is not adaptable to the finished shape or size of the members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having the same operation and quality as the type specified, subject to the Architect's approval.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Fasteners

1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation.

2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.

3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent that no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required.

4. Hardware shall be installed with the fasteners provided by the hardware manufacturer.

B. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for hardware installation.

1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material.

2.3 HANGING MEANS:

A. Unless otherwise noted, all hinges shall be full mortise three knuckle concealed bearing type, template, with fixed pins. All out swinging doors and exterior doors shall be furnished with non-removable pins (NRP).

B. All hinges for 1-3/4” thick doors shall be 4-1/2” wide in the open position. For other

thickness doors hinges shall be of a width to permit unobstructed swing of the doors. C. Size and weights of hinges shall conform to the following requirements:

Doors Up to 36” 4-1/2" high regular weight Greater than 36” up to 40” 5" high regular weight Greater than 40” up to 48” 5" high heavy weight

D. Heavy weight hinges may be specified at openings subject to heavy use or heavy abuse.

E. Quantity of hinges shall be provided to conform to the following requirements

Doors up to 60" in height 2 hinges Doors over 60" to 90" in height 3 hinges Doors over 90" to 120 " in height 4 hinges

F. Hinges shall be used in accordance with manufacturers published recommendations if



condition or application is not defined in this section.



2.4 MORTISE LOCKS

A. Manufacturer:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Schlage L9000 Series.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide mortise locks certified as ANSI A156.13, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security, and manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. Lock case shall be multi-function and field reversible for handing without opening the case. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

2. Provide locks with a standard 2-3/4 inches backset with a full 3/4 inch throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Deadbolt shall be a full 1 inch throw, constructed of stainless steel.

3. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 4. Provide electrical options as scheduled. Provide electrified locksets with micro switch

(RX) option that monitors the retractor crank, and is actuated when rotation of the inside or outside lever rotates the retractor hub. Provide normally closed contacts or normally open contacts as required by security system.

5. Lever trim shall be solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in the design specified, with wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Levers shall be thru-bolted to assure proper alignment, and shall have a 2-piece spindle.

a. Lever design shall be as specified in hardware sets. b. Lever trim on the secure side of doors serving rooms considered by the authority

having jurisdiction to be hazardous shall have a tactile warning.

2.5 FINAL CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. Coordinate a meeting with the owner to determine the key system and keying requirements for the new cylinders. Final cylinder to be full face cylinders.

B. Final Cylinders to have the following;

1. Full face cylinder with visual key control stampings. 2. Final biting list to be delivered to the owner.

C. Keys shall have the following;

1. Material: Nickel silver; minimum thickness of .092-inch (2.3mm) 2. Keys to be stamped with visual key control. 3. Key bow to have stamped “DO NOT DUPLICATE”. 4. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities.

a. Change (Day) Keys: 3 per cylinder/core. b. Final Control Keys: 3. c. Master Keys: 6.



2.6 EXIT DEVICES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Falcon 25 series with deadlatching

B. Requirements:

1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1, and UL listed for Panic Exit and/or Fire Exit Hardware. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

2. Exit devices shall be touchpad type, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to the standard architectural finishes to match the balance of the door hardware.

3. Touchpad shall extend a minimum of one half of the door width. Touch-pad finish shall be compatible to exit device finish. Compression springs will be used in devices, latches, and outside trims or controls, tension springs also acceptable.

4. Devices to incorporate a deadlatching feature for security and/or for future addition of alarm kits and/or other electrical requirements.

5. Provide manufacturer's standard strikes. 6. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Locate exit devices at a height

recommended by the exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by the Architect.

7. Mechanism case shall sit flush on the face of all flush doors, or spacers shall be furnished to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off the face of the door, provide glass bead kits.

8. Non-fire-rated exit devices shall have cylinder [hex key] dogging. 9. Removable mullions shall be a 2 inches x 3 inches steel tube. Where scheduled,

mullion shall be of a type that can be removed by use of a keyed cylinder, which is self-locking when re-installed.

10. Where lever handles are specified as outside trim for exit devices, provide heavy-duty lever trims with forged or cast escutcheon plates. Provide vandal-resistant levers that will travel to a 90-degree down position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and which can easily be re-set.

a. Lever style will match the lever style of the locksets. b. Lever trim on doors serving rooms considered by the authority having jurisdiction

to be hazardous shall have a tactile warning.

11. Exit devices for fire rated openings shall be UL labeled fire exit hardware. 12. Field drill weep holes per manufacturer’s recommendation for exit devices used in full

exterior application, highly corrosive areas, and where noted in the hardware sets. 13. Provide electrical options as scheduled.



2.7 DOOR CLOSERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Falcon SC70 series

B. Requirements:

1. Provide door closers certified to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by a BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. Closers shall be ISO 9000 certified. Units shall be stamped with date of manufacture code.

2. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with an aluminum cylinder. Closer body shall be 1-1/2 inch diameter, and heat-treated pinion journal shall be 11/16 inch diameter.

3. Provide hydraulic fluid requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to 10 degrees F. Fluid shall be fireproof and shall pass the requirements of the UL10C “positive pressure” fire test.

4. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck.

5. Closers shall not incorporate Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) technology. 6. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as

required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting.

7. Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Closers shall not be visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect.

2.8 PROTECTION PLATES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch thick as scheduled. Furnish with machine or wood screws, finished to match plates. Sizes of plates shall be as follows:

a. Kick Plates – 8 inches high x 2 inches less width of door on single doors, 1 inch less width of door on pairs



2.9 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Manufacturers:


Provide door stops for all doors in accordance with the following requirements:

2. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used.

3. Where wall stops cannot be used, provide dome type floor stops of the proper height. 4. At any opening where a wall or floor stop cannot be used, a medium duty surface

mounted overhead stop shall be used.

2.10 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING

A. Manufacturers:

1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Zero.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide thresholds, weatherstripping (including door sweeps, seals, astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items as closely as possible. Size of thresholds shall be as follows:

a. Saddle Thresholds – 1/2 inch high x jamb width x door width b. Bumper Seal Thresholds – 1/2 inch high x 5 inches wide x door width

2. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available.

3. Perimeter seals shall be installed uninterrupted three sides of opening. Where surface mounted perimeter seals are specified, furnish mounting brackets for the proper installation of surface closers and strikes.

2.11 SILENCERS

A. Manufacturers:


B. Requirements:

1. Provide "Push-in" type silencers for each hollow metal or wood frame. Provide three for each single frame and two for each pair frame. Omit where gasketing is specified or required by code.

2.12 FINISHES



A. Finish of all hardware shall be as specified within the hardware sets.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Existing Door and Frame Compatibility: Field verify existing doors and frames receiving new hardware and existing conditions receiving new openings. Verify that new hardware is compatible with the existing door and frame preparation and existing conditions.

C. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Where on-site modification of doors and frames is required, prepare hardware locations in accordance with the following:

1. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

2. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."

3. Where doors are in rated assemblies, comply with NFPA 80 for restrictions on on-site door hardware preparation.

4. Where on-site modification of existing doors and frames is required:

a. Remove existing hardware being replaced, tag, and store according to contract documents.

b. Field modify and prepare existing door and/or frame for new hardware being installed.

c. When modifications are exposed to view, use concealed fasteners, when possible.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Wood Flush Doors."

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, using only the fasteners provided by the manufacturer.

C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting.

D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

F. Operating parts shall move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance.

G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

H. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section. 2. Coordinate with owner for direction of the installation of permanent.

I. Wire (including low voltage): Coordinate with the following work, provided under the scope of Division 26, ELECTRICAL.

1. Conduit, junction boxes and wire pulls. 2. Connections to and from power supplies to electrified hardware. 3. Connections to fire/smoke alarm system and smoke evacuation system. 4. Connection of wire to door position switches and wire runs to central room or area, as

directed by Architect. 5. Testing and labeling wires with the Architect’s opening number.

J. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

K. Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings or in equipment room, or alternate location as directed by Architect.



1. Configuration: Provide [one power supply for each door opening][least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors] with electrified door hardware.

L. Thresholds: Set thresholds scheduled herein, in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

M. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present a tripping hazard.

N. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

O. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

P. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.


A. Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

1. Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees.

2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt.

3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three [six] <Insert number> months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.




A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide training for the Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of this section and the below-listed scheduled sets.

B. It is intended that the following schedule includes complete items of door hardware necessary to complete the work. If a discrepancy is found in the scheduled hardware sets, such as a missing item, improper hardware for a frame, door or fire codes, provisions of the above-specifications shall govern.

C. Locksets, exit devices, and other hardware items are referenced in the following hardware sets for series, type and function. Refer to the above-specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements.

D. Hardware Sets: SPEXTRA: 442394

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02

EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070L 07A 626 SCH 1 EA FULL FACE CYLINDER TO MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SS 689 FAL 1 EA MOP PLATE 8400 8" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE



HARDWARE GROUP NO. 03

EACH TO HAVE: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 25-R-L-AVA 630 FAL 1 EA FULL FACE CYLINDER TO MATCH EXISTING KEY SYSTEM 626 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 SS 689 FAL 1 EA MOP PLATE 8400 8" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 8" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

End of Section


GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Glazed entrances.


A. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to the current International Building Code] by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass

to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 4. Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees from vertical, design

glass to resist each of the following combinations of loads:

a. Outward design wind pressure minus the weight of the glass. Base design on glass type factors for short-duration load.

b. Inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus half of the design snow load. Base design on glass type factors for short-duration load.

c. Half of the inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus the design snow load. Base design on glass type factors for long-duration load.

5. Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness at thinnest part of the glass.

6. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.


GLAZING 088000 - 2


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches (300 mm) square.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.


A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within


GLAZING 088000 - 3

specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic-protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 2 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project. 1. Large-Missile Test: For all glazing, regardless of height above grade.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).

2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I, complying with other requirements specified and with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent.


a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear. b. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite. c. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite. d. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire.







GLAZING 088000 - 4

C. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

D. Pyrolytic-Coated, Self-Cleaning, Low-Maintenance Glass: Clear float glass with a coating on first surface having both photocatalytic and hydrophilic properties that act to loosen dirt and to cause water to sheet evenly over the glass instead of beading.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Spotless Ti. b. Cardinal Glass Industries; LoE2 Plus. c. Pilkington North America; Activ. d. PPG Industries, Inc.; SunClean.

2.3 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements.

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction

2.5 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING

A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.

2.6 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.







GLAZING 088000 - 5

3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer's designations

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

1. Applications: All Exterior windows and sliding doors.

C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

2.8 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a

full bead of liquid sealant.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.


GLAZING 088000 - 6

B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

F. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.10 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type: Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.11 LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type: Clear laminated glass with two plies of float glass.

1. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3.0 mm 2. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch (0.76 mm). 3. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.12 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 3.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Float glass/Ultraclear fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Argon. 5. Indoor Lite: Float Glass/Ultraclear fully tempered float glass. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface. 7. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.13 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES

A. Glass Type: 20-minute fire-rated glazing with hose-stream test; Retain subparagraph below if required.

1. Provide safety glazing labeling.


GLAZING 088000 - 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

3.2 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.


GLAZING 088000 - 8

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.


GLAZING 088000 - 9

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.



DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING 088113-1

SECTION 08 8113 DECORATIVE GLASS GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Digitally printed glass, including heat-treated, insulating glass units and laminated glass. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings -

Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2015. C. ASTM C724 - Standard Test Method for Acid Resistance of Ceramic Decorations on

Architectural-Type Glass D. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016. E. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;

2012. F. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2014. G. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;

2010. H. GANA TD 02-0402 - Heat-Treated Glass Surfaces Are Different I. GANA 01-0300 - Proper Procedures for Cleaning Architectural Glass Products

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

1.04 WARRANTY A. Provide limited 10-year warranty (See GGI warranty for Alice).

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Glass Fabricators: 1. GGI - General Glass International; Alice Digital Printed Glass:

www.generalglass.com/#sle. 2.02 GLASS MATERIALS

A. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless noted otherwise. 1. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048, Kind HS and FT. 2. Fully Tempered Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201 criteria.

B. Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172. 1. Laminated Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201 test requirements

for Category II. 2.03 GLAZING UNITS

A. Type G-16 - Direct to Glass Ceramic Printing: Ceramic frit is fused into glass creating permanent designs. 1. Applications: Locations as indicated on drawings. 2. Color: As indicated on drawings. 3. Printing Style: As indicated on drawings. 4. Glass Type: Fully tempered; monolithic glass system, LOW IRON 5. Thickness: 3/8 inch nominal. 6. Manufacturers:

http://www.ecfr.gov/

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ANSI%20Z97.1

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20C1036











a. GGI - General Glass International; Alice Direct-to-Glass Printing: www.generalglass.com/#sle.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

B. Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being provided. C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may

impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing system.

D. Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively. E. Proceed with glazing system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24 hours before glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates.

B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion.

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing

material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in glazing referenced standards.

B. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass manufacturer.

C. Set glass lites of system with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. D. Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated. E. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of

construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing, plastering, mortar droppings, etc.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their

products. C. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.

3.05 CLEANING A. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional

requirements. B. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using

solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. C. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete. D. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured. E. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial

Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations. F. Glass to be cleaned in accordance with: 1. GANA TD 02-0402 - Heat-Treated Glass Surfaces Are Different



2. GANA 01-0300 - Proper Procedures for Cleaning Architectural Glass Products

3.06 PROTECTION A. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of

Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION


NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09221-1

SECTION 09221 - NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).

1.2 SUBMITTAL



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

1.4 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Performance Requirements: Fabricate and install systems as indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C754 under the following conditions:

1. Gypsum board partitions: a. Standard systems: Maximum deflection of l/240 of partition height. b. Systems to receive water resistant gypsum board or backer board: Maximum

deflection of l/360 of partition height. 2. Interior suspended ceilings and soffits: Maximum deflection of l/360 of distance between

supports. 3. Nonstructural components that are permanently attached to structures and their support

attachments, shall be designed and constructed to resist the effects of earthquake motions in accordance to local jurisdiction.

B. Fire Resistance Ratings: Where fire resistance classifications are indicated, provide materials and application procedures identical to those listed by UL or tested according to ASTM E119 for type of construction shown.

C. Acoustical Ratings: Where sound ratings are indicated, provide materials and application procedures identical to those tested by manufacturer to achieve Sound Transmission Class (STC) scheduled or indicated in accordance with ASTM E90.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless

otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40(Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating,

unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch(0.45 mm) .

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-(50.8-mm-) deep

flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches(305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD VertiTrack VTD Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).

C. Firestop Track: As specified in Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch(0.45 mm) .

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch(1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-(12.7-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches(38.1 mm). 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches(38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch-(1.73-mm-)

thick, galvanized steel.

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch(0.45 mm) . 2. Depth: 7/8 inch(22.2 mm).

G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-(12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

2.3 CEILING AND SOFFIT SUPPORT MATERIALS



A. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts or other devices compatible with indicated

structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whose suitability has been proven through stand-ard construction practices or by certified test data.

B. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with

clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers [and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10x calculated loads].

C. Hangers:

1. Steel wire or rods, sizes to comply with requirements of ASTM C754 for ceiling or soffit area and loads to be supported.

2. Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized. 3. Rods and flats: 1. Mild steel components. 2. Finish: Galvanized or painted with rust-inhibitive paint for interior work; galvanized

for exterior work.

D. Framing System: 1. Framing system for gypsum board panels consisting of cold-rolled steel members conform-

ing to ASTM C635, with exposed surfaces finished in manufacturer’s standard enamel paint finish.

2. Fire rating: 1 [1-1/2] [2] [3] hour rating in accordance with UL assembly indicated. 3. Components: Main tees, furring cross channels, furring cross tees, and cross tees. 4. Accessories:

a. U-shaped channel molding. b. Galvanized carbon steel (12 ga.) hanger wire.

5. Acceptable product: Equivalent to Drywall Suspension System by USG.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 2. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),

nonperforated. 3. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener

penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch(3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

C. Backer Plates: 1. Steel, galvanized; 6 inches wide x 20 [16] gauge minimum x lengths to suit size of items to

be attached; fastened to studs for attachment of surface mounted fittings and accessories. 2. Elimination of backer plates or direct attachment of accessories or equipment to studs will

not be allowed.

D. Hanger Wire Sound Isolators: Provide where indicated for sound-rated suspended ceilings.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to

framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-

inch(12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-

rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

C. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,

or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches(610 mm) o.c.

D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch(3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.



GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 1

SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board panels for ceilings and soffits. 2. Gypsum board ceiling suspension system

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each of the following from a single manufacturer, unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Support framing members for gypsum board assemblies. 2. Gypsum board and other panel products. 3. Finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other

panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.


A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.




A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Room Temperatures: For non-adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less

than 40 deg F. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources.

C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts

during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Steel Framing and Furring: Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor. Dietrich Industries, Inc. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind.

2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Georgia Pacific Gypsum Corp. b. Lafarge Gypsum c. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Co.

2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

B. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency

C. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

D. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.0598-inch (1.5-mm) minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16-inch- (11.1-mm-) wide flanges, and as follows:

1. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) deep, 475 lb/1000 feet (70 kg/100 m), unless

otherwise indicated.

2. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep, 300 lb/1000 feet (45 kg/100 m), unless otherwise indicated.



3. Finish: ASTM A 653, G 60 (ASTM A 653M, Z 180) hot-dip galvanized coating for framing for exterior soffits and where indicated.

E. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees

and doubled over to form 3/16-inch- wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:

1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch (25 gage) unless otherwise indicated.

2. Depth: 2-1/2 inches unless otherwise indicated.

3. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot-dip galvanized coating.

F. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth of 7/8 inch and minimum thickness

0.0179 inch unless otherwise indicated. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot-dip galvanized coating.

2.3 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS

A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available that will minimize end-to-end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches. 1. Provide tapered edges, 1/2 inch thickness (high school ceiling), 5/8 inch thickness, unless

otherwise indicated. 2. At curved surfaces, Installer may provide multiple layers of equivalent thickness.

B. Gypsum Wallboard for Single and multilayer applications: ASTM C 36 and as follows: 3. Type: Regular except Type X or Type C where fire rated assembly is noted or required. 4. Type: Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces.

C. Abuse-Resistant Type: Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation, through-penetration (impact resistance), and abrasion than standard, regular-type and Type X gypsum board. 1. Core Type: Regular except Type X or Type C where fire rated assembly is noted or required. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch unless otherwise indicated.

D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints complying with

ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:

1. Material: Formed metal or plastic, with metal complying with the following requirement:

2. Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc.

3. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047:



4. Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Edge bead metal trim (LC-bead or L-bead with face flange formed to receive joint compound.) where edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed; L-type for tight abutment at edges, otherwise LC-type, similar to USG 200A. (U-bead, USG 400 Series trim or similar is not acceptable.)

C. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening.

D. Corner bead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Edge trim complying with shape LC-bead per Fig. 1, unless otherwise indicated.

F. One-piece control joint formed from rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot

opening.

G. Aluminum Reglet Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

1. Z molding Fry Reglet Corp. DRMZ-625-75 or equal. Other trim as required to suit conditions. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries.

3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.

4. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated.

B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. C. Use pressure-sensitive or staple-attached, open-weave, glass-fiber reinforcing tape with compatible

joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated.

D. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-mixed vinyl-based all-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements:



B. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: D. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:

1. PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex, Inc.; Contech Brands. 2. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp. 3. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.

1. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for laminating

gypsum panels.

2. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot-grouting hollow metal door frames.

3. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications:

4. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) thick And fastening

gypsum board to gypsum board:

a. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceilings.

3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL



A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook."

C. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING CEILING & SOFFIT FASCIA FRAMING

A. Install tracks (runners) at ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction.

B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.

D. Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings:

1. Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

3.5 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

B. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

C. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

D. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

E. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

F. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. G. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and

finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications.

3.6 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS



A. Single-Layer Application: 1. Locate edge joints over framing member 2. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. 3. On furring members, apply gypsum panels horizontally or vertically (parallel to framing) with

no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install cornerbead at external corners.

B. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other types are indicated.

C. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can

be attached to framing or supporting substrate.

D. Install Aluminum Reglet Trim at all location where indicated or where reveals are indicated in gypsum board assemblies.

3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:

1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at all panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration. Use ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound as applicable to the finish levels specified for the following:



a. Embedding and First Coat b. Fill (Second) Coat c. Finish (Third) Coat



PAINTING 09912 - 1

SECTION 09912 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Hollow metal doors and frames. 3. Plaster and Gypsum board. 4. Wood trim. 5. Existing Metal

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in

Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.

E. Coating Maintenance Manual: Upon conclusion of the project, the Contractor or paint manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as Sherwin-Williams “Custodian Project Color and Product Information” report or equal. Manual shall include an Area Summary with finish schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, Material Safety Data Sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used.


A. MPI Standards:


PAINTING 09912 - 2

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated.

3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark

samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sherwin Williams or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Finnaren & Haley, Inc. 3. ICI Paints. 4. M.A.B. Paints. 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:


PAINTING 09912 - 3

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.

2.3 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler (for unpainted block): MPI #4. 1. S-W: Loxon Block Surfacer, A24W200 (for new or unpainted block only)

2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: (for existing painted block or other walls in sound condition) MPI #17.

1. S-W Adhesion Primer, B51W8050.

B. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: (For unpainted interior gypsum drywall, plaster or wood) 1. S-W Premium Wall & Wood Primer, B28W-08111

2.5 METAL PRIMERS (for Door Frame)

A. Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based primer for interior/exterior metal doors/frames): MPI #107. 1. S-W: Pro Industrial Pro Cryl WB Universal Primer, B66-310

B. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer (Interior or exterior): MPI #134. 1. S-W: If required, Letter A Primer above can be selected

C. Interior Epoxy Primer/Sealer: (For concrete slab – floor) 1. GP 3477 Epoxy Water Emulsion Primer/Sealer

2.6 LATEX/ACRYLIC PAINTS

A. Interior Acrylic Latex (Eggshell finish for interior walls): MPI # 52 / 52X 1. S-W Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600

B. Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex (Semigloss finish interior & exterior metal doors/frames): MPI # 153

1. S-W DTM Acrylic Coating, B66 Series (semi-gloss)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.


PAINTING 09912 - 4

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Roughen/Abrade concrete in areas where sealing.

E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

H. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.


PAINTING 09912 - 5

4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

I. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets

and outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting. 2. Electrical Work:

a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with


PAINTING 09912 - 6

rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Block Substrates: Unpainted CMU block wall

1. Acrylic WB Acrylic Eg-shel Finish low odor/low VOC System: a. Prime Coat: S-W Loxon Block Surfacer, A24 (unpainted CMU block wall only) b. Intermediate: S-W Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-shel, B20-2600 c. Topcoat: 2 coats of S-W Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed WB Epoxy, K45 or K46 (select sheen).

B. Concrete Block Substrates: 1. Acrylic WB Acrylic Eg-shel Finish low odor/low VOC System:

a. Prime Coat: S-W Adhesion Primer, B51W8050 b. Intermediate: S-W Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-shel, B20-2600 c. Topocoat: S-W Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-shel, B20-2600

C. Gypsum Board Substrates (Public Areas):

a. Prime Coat: S-W Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28-2600 (New/Unpainted GWB)

b. Intermediate: S-W Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Eg-shel, B20-2600 c. Topcoat: 2 coats of S-W Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed WB Epoxy, K45 or K46 (select sheen).

D. Existing Metal Lintels:

a. Prime Coat: S-W DTM Primer-Finish, BV66W1 (for unpainted steel or galvanized steel).

b. Topcoat: Finish with 2 coats of Pro Industrial Acrylic, B66-660, 650 or 600 (select sheen).

E. Coffered Concrete Ceiling:


PAINTING 09912 - 7

a. Prime Coat: 1 Coat Concrete Masonry Primer b. Finish: 1-2 Coats Pro Industrial Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall

F. Wood:

b. Prime Coat: S-W Premium Wall & Wood Primer, B28 (for unpainted/new wood). b. Topcoat: Finish with 2 coats of Pro Industrial Acrylic, B66-660, 650 or 600

(select sheen).

G. Metal Door and Frame: a. Prime Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro Cryl WB Universal Primer, B66-310 b. Intermediate: S-W DTM Acrylic Coating, B66 Series c. Topcoat: S-W DTM Acrylic Coating, B66 Series



PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 - 1

SECTION 10 14 23 – PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. All primary and secondary directories, directionals, room identification, workstation ID’s

and signage for ADA and life safety code compliance.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 1: Administrative, procedural and temporary work requirements.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Signs and their installation shall comply with applicable provisions of the latest edition of the

following standards and with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction: 1. ADAAG – Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board.

2. International Code Council/American National Standards Institute A117.1-Standard on Accessible and Usable Buildings Facilities.

3. National Fire Protection Association 101 Life Safety Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review:

1. Signage schedule in manufacturer's format for verification of text/copy.

2. Approval drawings showing materials, construction detail, lay-out, copy, size and

mounting methods.

3. Engineering drawings for each sign type.

4. Sample of two sign types for verification of materials, color, pattern, overall quality, and for adherence to drawings and requirements indicated.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum

five years experience. Obtain signs from one source and a single manufacturer.

1.5 WARRANTY



A. Provide manufacturer’s warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for minimum 5 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Signage shall be Fusion as manufactured by Takeform, 1.800.528.1398, www.takeform.net or Architect approved equal.

B. Substitutions: Bidder must obtain prior written approval from the Architect and/or Owner to bid alternates or substitutions to the specification.

2.2 SIGN STANDARDS

A. It is the intent of these specifications to establish a sign standard for the Owner including but not limited to primary and secondary directories, wall mounted and overhead directionals, flag mounted directionals, primary room identification, restrooms, conference room, work station ID’s and all code compliant signage. While the Owner may not obtain all signs and sign types, the signage contractor shall design and submit approval drawings for all.

B. Engineered and Tested:

1. The signage system shall have undergone rigorous testing to ensure longevity and optimal performance. Testing shall include environmental testing to ensure that materials can withstand changes in temperature and humidity without distortion as well as testing to ensure resistance to chemicals and UV effects. Further, mechanical testing shall ensure that the tensile and pull-out strength of mounting hardware is adequate to ensure a safe installation. Test data shall be included with submittals.

C. Typography: 1. Type style: see drawings. Copy shall be a true, clean, accurate reproduction of

typeface(s) specified. Upper and lower case or all caps shall be as indicated in Sign Type drawings and Signage Schedule. Letter spacing to be normal and interline spacing shall be set by manufacturer.

2. Arrows, symbols and logo art: To be provided in style, sizes, colors and spacing as shown in drawings.

3. Grade II Braille utilizing perfectly round, clear insertion beads.

D. Evacuation Maps:

1. Evacuation maps shall have a unique “you-are-here” orientation as well as two emergency egress paths. The maps shall show location of fire extinguishers, fire pulls, stairwells, elevators and restrooms.

E. Color and Finishes:

1. Colors, patterns and artwork: see drawings.



2. Message Background: see drawings .

3. Finishes are to meet current federal ADA and all state and local requirements. 2.3 SIGNS

A. Signage System:

1. The signage shall incorporate a decorative laminate face with applied graphics including all tactile requirements in adherence to ADA specifications.

2. All signs, including work station and room ID's, overheads and flag mounts, directionals and directories shall have a matching appearance and constructed utilizing the same manufacturing process to ensure a consistent look throughout.

B. Materials:

1. Sign face shall be 0.035” (nominal) standard grade, high pressure surface laminate. A painted sign face shall not be acceptable.

2. The sign shall incorporate balanced construction with the core sandwiched between laminates to prevent warping. Laminate on the sign face only shall not be acceptable.

3. Tactile lettering shall be precision machined, raised 1/32", matte PETG and subsurface

colored for scratch resistance.

4. Signs shall incorporate a metal accent bar. Bars shall be anodized with a brushed satin finish. Painted bars shall not be acceptable. Refer to drawings.

C. Standard Colors:

1. Face/background color shall be standard grade, high pressure laminate, all colors and finishes. Refer to drawings.

2. Standard tactile colors shall match manufacturer's ADA standard color selection. Refer to drawings.

D. Construction:

1. The signage shall, with the exception of directories and directionals, be a uniform 8 ½” width to facilitate inserts printed on standard width paper.

2. Insert components shall have a .080 thickness non-glare acrylic window and shall be inlaid flush to sign face for a smooth, seamless appearance.

3. The signage shall include modules allowing for inserts, notice holders, occupancy sliders,

marker, magnetic, and cork boards. All modules shall be flush to sign face for a smooth, seamless appearance.

4. The laminates (front and back) shall be pressure laminated and precision machined

together to a 90-degree angle. Edges shall be smooth, void of chips, burrs, sharp edges and marks.



5. The signage shall utilize an acrylic sphere for Grade II Braille inserted directly into a scratch resistant, high pressure laminate sign face. Braille dots are to be pressure fit in high tolerance drilled holes.

6. Braille dots shall be half hemispherical domed and protruding a minimum 0.025”. 7. The signage shall utilize a pressure activated adhesive. The adhesive shall be

nonhazardous and shall allow for flexing and deflection of the adhered components due to changes in temperature and moisture without bond failure.

8. All signs shall be provided with appropriate mounting hardware. Hardware shall be finished and architectural in appearance and suitable for the mounting surface.

9. Some signs may be installed on glass. A blank backer is required to be placed on the

opposite side of the glass to cover tape and adhesive. The backer shall match the sign in size and shape.

E. Printed Inserts:

1. The signage shall be capable of accepting paper or acetate inserts to allow changing and

updating as required. Insert components shall have a 0.080” thickness non-glare acrylic window and shall be inlayed flush to sign face for a smooth, seamless appearance.

2. The signage contractor shall provide and install all signage inserts

3. Manufacturer shall provide a template containing layout, font, color, artwork and trim lines to allow Owner to produce inserts on laser or ink jet printer. The template shall be in an Acrobat or Word format (.pdf).

F. Quantities: Refer to Signage Schedule for additional information on signage

Code and Facility Signage:

Sign Type A Directory NOT USED Sign Type B Directional Sign Type C Overhead Sign Type D Evacuation Map NOT USED Sign Type E Stairs Sign Type E.2 Restroom NOT USED Sign Type E.3 Misc. Room ID NOT USED Sign Type F Small Room ID NOT USED Sign Type G Medium Room ID Sign Type G.2 Large Room ID Sign Type H Room ID Changeable Insert Sign Type I Room ID Changeable Insert NOT USED Sign Type J Conference Room Sign Type L Book Stack Sign Type M Flag Mount NOT USED Sign Type N Interior Stairwell Sign Type N.2 Informational or Caution/Prohibitory Sign Type S Free-Standing (Stance) NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION



3.1 SITE VISITS

A. Site visits – 3 site visits shall be required by the sign contractor: 1. Prior to submission of bid for site assessment and evaluation.

2. Post award for the purposes of meeting with Owners and project manager.

3. Final walk-through and punchlist.

B. Programming – sign contractor shall perform all wayfinding & programming. Programming

shall include location plan, message schedule, and/or plots, fire/evacuation maps and insert graphics. All programming materials shall be submitted for approval.

3.2 CODE COMPLIANCE

A. It shall be the responsibility of the successful bidder to meet any and all local, state, and federal code requirements in fabricating and installing signs.

3.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, PROTECTION

A. Package to prevent damage or deterioration during shipment, handling, storage and installation. Products should remain in original packaging until removal is necessary. Store products in a dry, indoor location.

3.4 EXAMINATION

A. Installer shall examine signs for defects, damage and compliance with specifications. Installation shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Installation locations shall be in accordance with ADA specifications. Locate signs where indicated using mounting methods in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions: 1. The signage contractor shall coordinate installation schedules with the Owner and/or

Construction Manager.

2. Installation shall be performed by manufacturer’s personnel trained and certified in manufacturer’s methods and procedures.

3. The signage contractor shall submit a CAD generated location plan noting the location of

all signage and cross referenced to message schedule or plots for architect’s approval.

4. Installer to conduct a pre-installation survey prior to manufacturing to verify copy and sign location. Each location shall be noted using a low tack vinyl reproduction of actual sign. Full scale renderings of directories and directionals shall also be provided. Any location discrepancy or message issues shall be submitted to architect for review.

5. Signs shall be level, plumb, and at heights indicated with sign surfaces free from defects.



6. Upon completion of the work, signage contractor shall remove unused or discarded

materials, containers and debris from site. 3.6 WEB PORTAL AND STANDARDS MANUAL

A. Web Portal: Manufacturer shall provide a password protected web portal enabling Owner to view and access all sign types comprising the sign system. The sign types shall be priced and shall be capable of purchase directly from the portal.

B. Manufacturer shall provide a comprehensive Standards Manual in both a paper and PDF format. The manual shall include all graphic standards, sign type descriptions, renderings showing color, pattern and finish, engineering drawings, location plans, plots, artwork, insert templates, mounting detail, and reorder information.

END OF SECTION